sjzl20060311-zxr10 26092818s2826s2852s access switch users manual
TRANSCRIPT
ZXR102609/2818S/2826S/2852S
Access Switch User’s Manual
Version 1.0
ZTE CORPORATION ZTE Plaza, Keji Road South, Hi-Tech Industrial Park, Nanshan District, Shenzhen, P. R. China 518057 Tel: (86) 755 26771900 800-9830-9830 Fax: (86) 755 26772236 URL: http://support.zte.com.cn E-mail: [email protected]
LEGAL INFORMATION Copyright © 2005 ZTE CORPORATION. The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction or distribution of this document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the prior written consent of ZTE CORPORATION is prohibited. Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by contractual confidentiality obligations. All company, brand and product names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks, of ZTE CORPORATION or of their respective owners. This document is provided “as is”, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or conditions are disclaimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, title or non-infringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the use of or reliance on the information contained herein. ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications covering the subject matter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE CORPORATION and its licensee, the user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter herein. The contents of this document and all policies of ZTE CORPORATION, including without limitation policies related to support or training are subject to change without notice.
Revision History
Date Revision No. Serial No. Description
2005/11/01 R1.3 sjzl20060311
ZTE CORPORATION Values Your Comments & Suggestions!
Your opinion is of great value and will help us improve the quality of our product documentation and offer better services to our customers.
Please fill out the following questionnaire and fax to:
(86) 755-26772236;
Or mail to:
Publications R&D Department, ZTE CORPORATION, ZTE Plaza, A Wing, Keji Road South, Hi-Tech Industrial Park, Shenzhen, P. R. China 518057.
Thank you for your cooperation!
Your Comments & Suggestions Document Name ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
Product Version V1.0 Document
Revision Number R1.3
Equipment Installation Date
Presentation:
(Introductions, Procedures, Illustrations, Completeness, Level of Detail, Organization, Appearance)
Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A
Accessibility:
(Contents, Index, Headings, Numbering, Glossary)
Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A
Your evaluation of this document
Intelligibility:
(Language, Vocabulary, Readability & Clarity, Technical Accuracy, Content)
Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A
Your suggestions for improvement of this document
Please check the suggestions which you feel can improve this documentation:
Improve the overview/introduction Make it more concise/brief
Improve the Contents Add more step-by-step procedures
Improve the organization Add more troubleshooting information
Include more figures Make it less technical
Add more examples Add more/better quick reference aids
Add more detail Improve the index
Other suggestions
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
# Please feel free to write any comments on an attached sheet.
If you wish to be contacted regarding your comments, please complete the following:
Name Company
Postcode Address
Telephone E-mail
Contents
About this User’s Manual.................................................. xxiii Purpose of this User’s Manual........................................................ xxiv Typographical Conventions ............................................................ xxv Mouse Operation Conventions....................................................... xxvi Safety Signs................................................................................xxvii How to Get in Touch....................................................................xxviii
Customer Support ...................................................................................xxviii Documentation Support ...........................................................................xxviii
Chapter 1..............................................................................29
Safety Description ...............................................................29 Safety Instructions..........................................................................29 Sign Description..............................................................................30
Chapter 2..............................................................................31
System Overview.................................................................31 Product Overview............................................................................31 Functions .......................................................................................32 Networking Mode............................................................................33
Workgroup Networking Mode ...................................................................... 33 MAN Broadband Access Networking Mode.................................................... 34
Technical Features and Parameters ..................................................36
Chapter 3..............................................................................37
Structure & Principle ...........................................................37
Working Principle ............................................................................37 Hardware Structure.........................................................................39
ZXR10 2609................................................................................................39 ZXR10 2818S .............................................................................................40 ZXR10 2826S .............................................................................................42 ZXR10 2852S .............................................................................................43
Sub-boards ....................................................................................45 FFEI............................................................................................................45 FGEI...........................................................................................................46 FGFI ...........................................................................................................47 FGFE ..........................................................................................................48
Power Supply Module......................................................................48 ZXR10 2609................................................................................................48 ZXR10 2818S/2826S ..................................................................................49 ZXR10 2852S .............................................................................................49
Chapter 4 ............................................................................. 51
Installation and Debugging ................................................ 51 Installing the Equipment..................................................................51
Installing the Switch on Desktop ..................................................................51 Installing the Switch onto a Cabinet .............................................................52
Installation of Cables.......................................................................56 Installing Power Cables................................................................................56 Installing Configuration Cables.....................................................................58 Installing Network Cables ............................................................................59 Installing Fibers...........................................................................................60 Labels.........................................................................................................61
Cable Lightning Protection Requirements ..........................................65 System Debugging..........................................................................68
Connection Configuration.............................................................................68
Power-on Procedure.................................................................................... 71 Indicator Status.......................................................................................... 73 System Boot Procedure............................................................................... 74
Chapter 5..............................................................................77
Usage and Operation...........................................................77
Configuration Modes........................................................................77 Configuration Through Console Port Connection ........................................... 78 Configuration Through TELNET Session........................................................ 78 Configuration Through SNMP Connection ..................................................... 80
Command Mode .............................................................................81 User Mode.................................................................................................. 81 Global Configuration Mode........................................................................... 82 SNMP Configuration Mode ........................................................................... 82 Layer 3 Configuration Mode......................................................................... 83 File System Configuration Mode................................................................... 83 NAS Configuration Mode ............................................................................. 84 Cluster Management Configuration Mode..................................................... 84
Usage of Command Line..................................................................85 Online Help................................................................................................. 85 Command Abbreviations............................................................................. 87 History Command....................................................................................... 87 Functional Key............................................................................................ 87
Chapter 6..............................................................................89
System Management...........................................................89 File System Management.................................................................89
File system Introduction.............................................................................. 89 File System Operations ............................................................................... 90
TFTP Configuration..........................................................................91 Import and Export of Configuration ..................................................93
Backup and Recovery of Files...........................................................94 Software Version Upgrade ...............................................................96
Viewing the Version Information ..................................................................96 Version Upgrade When the System is Normal...............................................97 Version Upgrade When the System is Abnormal ...........................................98
Chapter 7 ...........................................................................105
Service Configuration........................................................105 Port Configuration.........................................................................105
Basic Configuration....................................................................................105 Port Information........................................................................................111
Port Mirroring ...............................................................................113 Introduction..............................................................................................113 Basic Configuration....................................................................................114 Configuration Example ..............................................................................115
VLAN Configuration.......................................................................115 Introduction..............................................................................................115 Basic Configuration....................................................................................116 Configuration Example ..............................................................................117
MAC Table Operations ...................................................................120 Introduction..............................................................................................120 Basic Configuration....................................................................................121
LACP Configuration .......................................................................122 Introduction..............................................................................................122 Basic Configurations ..................................................................................122 Configuration Example ..............................................................................124
IGMP Snooping Configuration.........................................................126 Introduction..............................................................................................126 Basic Configuration....................................................................................126 Configuration Example ..............................................................................129
MSTP Configuration.......................................................................131 Introduction...............................................................................................131 Basic Configuration ....................................................................................133 Configuration Example...............................................................................135
QoS Configuration.........................................................................138 Introduction...............................................................................................138 Basic Configuration ....................................................................................139 Configuration Example...............................................................................141
PVLAN Configuration .....................................................................143 Introduction...............................................................................................143 Basic Configuration ....................................................................................144 Configuration Example...............................................................................144
802.1x Transparent Transmission Configuration ..............................145 Layer 3 Configuration....................................................................146
Introduction...............................................................................................146 IP Port Configuration..................................................................................147 Static Route Configuration..........................................................................148 ARP Table Entry Configuration....................................................................149
Access Service Configuration..........................................................150 Introduction...............................................................................................150 Basic Configuration ....................................................................................155 Configuration Example...............................................................................161
QinQ Configuration........................................................................164 Introduction...............................................................................................164 Basic Configuration ....................................................................................166 Configuration Example...............................................................................167
Chapter 8............................................................................169
Network Management.......................................................169
Remote-Access.............................................................................169
Introduction..............................................................................................169 Basic Configuration....................................................................................169 Configuration Example ..............................................................................170
SSH.............................................................................................171 Introduction..............................................................................................171 Basic Configuration....................................................................................172 Configuration Example ..............................................................................172
SNMP...........................................................................................177 Introduction..............................................................................................177 Basic Configuration....................................................................................178 Configuration Example ..............................................................................179
RMON..........................................................................................181 Introduction..............................................................................................181 Basic Configuration....................................................................................181 Configuration Example ..............................................................................185
Cluster Management .....................................................................187 Introduction..............................................................................................187 ZDP Configuration.....................................................................................190 ZTP Configuration......................................................................................192 Cluster Configuration.................................................................................194 Configuration Example ..............................................................................197
Chapter 9 ...........................................................................203
Maintenance ......................................................................203
Routine Maintenance.....................................................................203 Items of Daily Maintenance........................................................................203 Items of Monthly Maintenance ...................................................................204 Maintenance Period ...................................................................................205
Common Test Methods..................................................................206 Single-Port Loop Test ................................................................................206
Virtual Circuit Test......................................................................................207 Common Troubleshooting..............................................................208
Failed to Configure through the Console Port...............................................208 Failed to Connect Through Telnet................................................................210 Failed to Log In to the Switch Through Telnet..............................................211 Missing User Name or Password .................................................................211 Missing enable Password............................................................................215 Failed to Interconnect Two Devices in the Same VLAN.................................215
Chapter 10 .........................................................................217
Command Reference .........................................................217 Introduction .................................................................................217 Management Commands...............................................................218
adminpass.................................................................................................218 config router..............................................................................................219 config snmp...............................................................................................219 config tffs ..................................................................................................219 create User................................................................................................220 delete User................................................................................................220 enable.......................................................................................................221 exit ...........................................................................................................221 hostname..................................................................................................221 line-vty......................................................................................................222 list.............................................................................................................222 loginpass...................................................................................................222 ping ..........................................................................................................223 readconfig .................................................................................................223 reboot.......................................................................................................223 saveconfig.................................................................................................224 set date.....................................................................................................224 set loginauth..............................................................................................224
set specialVlan1 ........................................................................................225 show date-time.........................................................................................225 show loginauth..........................................................................................225 show running-config..................................................................................226 show specialVlan1.....................................................................................226 show start-config.......................................................................................226 show terminal ...........................................................................................227 show vct...................................................................................................227 show user.................................................................................................227 sysLocation...............................................................................................228 terminal log ..............................................................................................228 terminal monitor .......................................................................................228 version .....................................................................................................229
File System ..................................................................................229 cd.............................................................................................................229 copy .........................................................................................................230 format ......................................................................................................230 ls..............................................................................................................231 md ...........................................................................................................231 remove.....................................................................................................231 rename.....................................................................................................232 tftp...........................................................................................................232
Port Configuration.........................................................................233 clear port ..................................................................................................233 create port name ......................................................................................234 set port.....................................................................................................234 set port auto .............................................................................................235 set port bandwidth ....................................................................................235 set port dscp-priority .................................................................................236 set port default-priority..............................................................................237
set port description ....................................................................................237 set port duplex ..........................................................................................238 set port flowcontrol ....................................................................................238 set port ingress_limit_mode .......................................................................239 set port macaddress ..................................................................................240 set port multicast-filter...............................................................................240 set port poe...............................................................................................241 set port priority..........................................................................................241 set port remapping-tag ..............................................................................242 set port sa-priority .....................................................................................243 set port security.........................................................................................243 set port speed ...........................................................................................244 set port speedadvertise..............................................................................244 set port user-priority..................................................................................245 set port vlan-priority ..................................................................................246 set trunk multicast-filter .............................................................................246 show port..................................................................................................247 show port qos............................................................................................247 show port statistics ....................................................................................248 show trunk................................................................................................248
Port Mirroring ...............................................................................249 set mirror add source-port .........................................................................249 set mirror delete source-port......................................................................249 set mirror dest-port ...................................................................................250 show mirror...............................................................................................250
VLAN Configuration.......................................................................251 clear vlan name.........................................................................................251 create vlan name.......................................................................................251 set port pvid..............................................................................................252 set trunk pvid ............................................................................................252
set vlan.....................................................................................................253 set vlan add port .......................................................................................253 set vlan add trunk .....................................................................................254 set vlan delete port....................................................................................255 set vlan delete trunk..................................................................................255 set vlan fid................................................................................................256 set vlan priority .........................................................................................256 show vlan .................................................................................................257
MAC Address Table Configuration...................................................258 set fdb add................................................................................................258 set fdb agingtime ......................................................................................259 set fdb delete............................................................................................259 set fdb filter ..............................................................................................260 show fdb...................................................................................................260 show fdb agingtime...................................................................................261 show fdb dynamic port ..............................................................................261 show fdb mac ...........................................................................................262 show fdb port............................................................................................262 show fdb vlan............................................................................................262 show fdb vlan port.....................................................................................263
LACP Configuration .......................................................................263 set lacp.....................................................................................................263 set lacp aggregator add port......................................................................264 set lacp aggregator delete port...................................................................264 set lacp aggregator mode..........................................................................265 set lacp port mode ....................................................................................266 set lacp port timeout .................................................................................266 set lacp priority .........................................................................................267 show lacp..................................................................................................267 show lacp aggregator ................................................................................267
show lacp port...........................................................................................268 IGMP Snooping Configuration.........................................................269
set igmp snooping .....................................................................................269 set igmp snooping add vlan........................................................................269 set igmp snooping crossvlan.......................................................................270 set igmp snooping delete vlan ....................................................................270 set igmp snooping fastleave .......................................................................271 set igmp snooping lastmember_query ........................................................271 set igmp snooping query vlan.....................................................................272 set igmp snooping query_interval...............................................................272 set igmp snooping response_interval ..........................................................273 set igmp snooping timeout.........................................................................274 set igmp snooping vlan add group ..............................................................274 set igmp snooping vlan delete group...........................................................275 show igmp snooping ..................................................................................276 show igmp snooping vlan...........................................................................276
MSTP Configuration.......................................................................277 clear stp instance.......................................................................................277 clear stp name...........................................................................................277 set stp.......................................................................................................278 set stp agemax..........................................................................................278 set stp edge-port .......................................................................................279 set stp forceversion....................................................................................279 set stp forwarddelay ..................................................................................280 set stp hellotime ........................................................................................280 set stp hmd5-digest...................................................................................281 set stp hmd5-key.......................................................................................281 set stp hopmax..........................................................................................281 set stp instance bridgeprio..........................................................................282 set stp instance port cost............................................................................282
set stp instance port priority.......................................................................283 set stp instance trunk cost .........................................................................284 set stp instance trunk priority.....................................................................284 set stp instance vlan..................................................................................285 set stp name.............................................................................................286 set stp port ...............................................................................................286 set stp port linktype...................................................................................287 set stp port packettype..............................................................................287 set stp relay..............................................................................................288 set stp revision..........................................................................................288 set stp trunk .............................................................................................288 set stp trunk linktype.................................................................................289 set stp trunk packettype............................................................................289 show stp...................................................................................................290 show stp instance......................................................................................290 show stp port............................................................................................291 show stp trunk..........................................................................................292
QoS Configuration.........................................................................292 set qos queue-schedule.............................................................................292 set qos priority-map user-priority...............................................................293 set qos priority-map ip-priority...................................................................293 show qos queue-schedule..........................................................................294 show qos priority-map...............................................................................294
PVLAN Configuration .....................................................................294 set pvlan session.......................................................................................294 show pvlan ...............................................................................................295
802.1x Transparent Transmission Configuration ..............................296 set 802.1xrelay.........................................................................................296 show 802.1xrelay......................................................................................296
Layer 3 Configuration....................................................................297
arp add .....................................................................................................297 arp delete..................................................................................................298 arp ipport timeout......................................................................................298 clear arp....................................................................................................299 clear ipport................................................................................................299 clear iproute ..............................................................................................300 iproute ......................................................................................................301 set ipport...................................................................................................302 set ipport ipaddress....................................................................................302 set ipport mac ...........................................................................................303 set ipport vlan............................................................................................304 show arp...................................................................................................305 show ipport ...............................................................................................306 show iproute..............................................................................................306
Access Service Configuration..........................................................307 aaa-control port accounting........................................................................307 aaa-control port dot1x ...............................................................................307 aaa-control port keepalive..........................................................................308 aaa-control port keepalive period................................................................308 aaa-control port max-hosts ........................................................................309 aaa-control port multiple-hosts...................................................................309 aaa-control port port-mode........................................................................310 aaa-control port protocol............................................................................310 dot1x max-request ....................................................................................311 dot1x quiet-period .....................................................................................311 dot1x re-authenticate ................................................................................312 dot1x re-authenticate period ......................................................................312 dot1x server-timeout .................................................................................312 dot1x supplicant-timeout............................................................................313 dot1x tx-period..........................................................................................313
clear client ................................................................................................314 clear client index .......................................................................................314 clear client port .........................................................................................314 clear client vlan .........................................................................................315 radius isp..................................................................................................315 radius isp add accounting ..........................................................................316 radius isp add authentication .....................................................................316 radius isp defaultisp...................................................................................317 radius isp delete accounting.......................................................................317 radius isp delete authentication..................................................................317 radius isp description.................................................................................318 radius isp client .........................................................................................318 radius isp fullaccount .................................................................................319 radius isp sharedsecret..............................................................................319 radius nasname ........................................................................................320 radius retransmit.......................................................................................320 radius timeout...........................................................................................320 show aaa-control port................................................................................321 show dot1x...............................................................................................321 show client................................................................................................321 show client index.......................................................................................322 show client mac ........................................................................................322 show client port.........................................................................................322 show radius ..............................................................................................323
QinQ Configuration........................................................................323 set qinq customer port...............................................................................323 set qinq tpid..............................................................................................324 set qinq uplink port....................................................................................324 show qinq.................................................................................................325
Remote-access Configuration.........................................................325
clear remote-access all...............................................................................325 clear remote-access ipaddress....................................................................325 set remote-access......................................................................................326 set remote-access ipaddress ......................................................................326 show remote-access ..................................................................................327
SSH Configuration.........................................................................327 set ssh ......................................................................................................327 show ssh...................................................................................................327
SNMP Configuration ......................................................................328 clear community........................................................................................328 clear traphost ............................................................................................328 clear view..................................................................................................329 create community......................................................................................329 create view................................................................................................330 set community view...................................................................................331 set trap .....................................................................................................331 set traphost...............................................................................................332 show snmp................................................................................................333
RMON Configuration......................................................................333 set alarm...................................................................................................333 set event...................................................................................................336 set history .................................................................................................337 set rmon ...................................................................................................339 set statistics...............................................................................................339 show alarm ...............................................................................................341 show event................................................................................................341 show history..............................................................................................342 show rmon................................................................................................343 show statistics ...........................................................................................343
Cluster Management Configuration.................................................343
erase member ..........................................................................................343 reboot member.........................................................................................344 save member............................................................................................344 set group add device .................................................................................345 set group add mac ....................................................................................345 set group candidate...................................................................................346 set group commander ipport......................................................................346 set group delete member ..........................................................................347 set group independent...............................................................................347 set group handtime...................................................................................347 set group holdtime ....................................................................................348 set group name.........................................................................................349 set group tftpsvr........................................................................................349 set zdp .....................................................................................................350 set zdp holdtime........................................................................................350 set zdp port ..............................................................................................350 set zdp timer.............................................................................................351 set zdp trunk.............................................................................................352 set ztp ......................................................................................................352 set ztp hop................................................................................................353 set ztp hopdelay........................................................................................353 set ztp port ...............................................................................................354 set ztp portdelay .......................................................................................354 set ztp timer .............................................................................................355 set ztp trunk .............................................................................................356 set ztp vlan...............................................................................................356 show group...............................................................................................357 show group candidate ...............................................................................357 show group member .................................................................................357 show zdp ..................................................................................................358 show zdp neighbour ..................................................................................358
show ztp ...................................................................................................358 show ztp device.........................................................................................359 show ztp mac............................................................................................359 ztp start ....................................................................................................360
Single-port Loop Test ....................................................................360 set loopDetect blockDelay ..........................................................................360 set loopDetect port ....................................................................................360 set loopDetect port protect.........................................................................361 set loopDetect trunk...................................................................................361 set loopDetect trunk protect .......................................................................362 show loopDetect ........................................................................................363
Appendix A.........................................................................365
Abbreviations.....................................................................365
Figures ...............................................................................371
Tables.................................................................................373
This page is intentionally blank.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION xxiii
About this User’s Manual
This manual applies to the following access switch models:
ZXR10 2609 access switch
ZXR10 2818S access switch
ZXR10 2826S access switch
ZXR10 2852S access switch
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S (V1.0) access switch is also referred to as ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S for short, or switch in the universal part.
ZXR10 2609LE/2818SLE/2826SLE/2852SLE access switch series are a simplified version of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S access switch. Their functions are simplified on the basis of functions of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S. But the hardware structure of ZXR10 2609LE/2818SLE/2826SLE/2852SLE access switch series is the same as ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S. The function simplification involves the following parts:
1. QoS functions
Cancel the function of determining priority of data packet based on static resource MAC address (SA) and VLAN priority.
Cancel the support to the 802.1p subscriber priority remap function on the port.
Cancel the support to the OUT port speed restriction function.
2. Cancel the support to the QINQ function.
3. Reduce eight LACP groups of 2852SLE (On the 2852S, 16 groups are supported.)
4. Only the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and RSTP are supported. The MSTP is not supported now.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
xxiv Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Except for those specified as the contents for LE serial switches, the rest common contents are applicable to all switches.
Purpose of this User’s Manual This manual consists of ten chapters and one appendix.
Chapter 1 Safety Instructions introduces the safety signs and their meanings.
Chapter 2 System Overview introduces the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S system briefly.
Chapter 3 Structure & Principles introduces the structure and working principles of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S.
Chapter 4 Installation and Debugging introduces the installation and debugging methods of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S.
Chapter 5 Usage & Operations introduces the configuration methods, command mode, and usage of command line.
Chapter 6 System Management introduces the system management of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S.
Chapter 7 Basic Configuration introduces the service data configuration of ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S.
Chapter 8 Network Management introduces the network management configuration of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S.
Chapter 9 Maintenance introduces the routine maintenance of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S.
Chapter 10 Command Reference introduces the commands supported by the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S.
About this User’s Manual
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION xxv
Appendix A Abbreviations
Typographical Conventions ZTE documents employ the following typographical conventions.
T AB L E 1 TY P O G R AP H I C AL C O N V E N T I O N S
Typeface Meaning
Italics References to other guides and documents; parameter values
“Quotes” Links on screens
Bold Menus, menu options, input fields, radio button names, check boxes, drop-down lists, dialog box names, window names
CAPS Keys on the keyboard and buttons on screens and company name
Constant width
Text that you type, program code, files and directory names, and function names
[ ] Optional parameters
{ } Mandatory parameters
| Select one of the parameters that are delimited by it
Note: Provides additional information about a certain topic
Checkpoint: Indicates that a particular step needs to be checked before proceeding further
Tip: Indicates a suggestion or hint to make things easier or more productive for the reader
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
xxvi Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Mouse Operation Conventions T AB L E 2 M O U S E OP E R AT I O N C O N V E N T I O N S
Typeface Meaning
Click Refers to clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) once.
Double-click Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) twice.
Right-click Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button (usually the right mouse button) once.
Drag Refers to pressing and holding a mouse button and moving the mouse.
About this User’s Manual
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION xxvii
Safety Signs T AB L E 3 S AF E T Y S I G N S
Safety Signs
Meaning
Danger: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. This signal word should be limited to only extreme situations.
Warning: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Caution: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Erosion: Beware of erosion.
Electric shock: There is a risk of electric shock.
Electrostatic: The device may be sensitive to static electricity.
Microwave: Beware of strong electromagnetic field.
Laser: Beware of strong laser beam.
No flammables: No flammables can be stored.
No touching: Do not touch.
No smoking: Smoking is forbidden.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
xxviii Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
How to Get in Touch The following sections provide information on how to obtain support for the documentation and the software.
Customer Support If you have problems, questions, comments, or suggestions regarding your product, contact us by e-mail at [email protected]. You can also call our customer support center at (86) 755 26771900 and (86) 800-9830-9830.
Documentation Support ZTE welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document. For further questions, comments, or suggestions on the documentation, you can contact us by e-mail at [email protected]; or you can fax your comments and suggestions to (86) 755 26772236. You can also explore our website at http://support.zte.com.cn, which contains various interesting subjects like documentation, knowledge base, forum and service request.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 29
C h a p t e r 1
Safety Description
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Safety instructions
Sign description
Safety Instructions Only the properly trained professional personnel are qualified for the installation, operation, and maintenance of this equipment.
Observe the local safety specifications and relevant operating procedures in equipment installation, operation and maintenance, to avoid personal injury or damage to the equipment. The safety precautions in this manual can only be used as a supplement to local safety regulations.
ZTE Corporation assumes no responsibility for consequences resulting from violation of general specifications for safety operations or of safety rules for design, production and use of equipment.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
30 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Sign Description Contents deserving special attention when configuring the
equipment are explained in the following format:
Caution: Ignoring safety precautions may result in equipment faults.
Note: Contents that you need to pay special attention to besides the safety precautions.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 31
C h a p t e r 2
System Overview
In this chapter, you will learn about:
An overall introduction to the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
Rich software/hardware functions of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
Networking mode of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
Technical features of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
Parameters of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
Product Overview ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S access switches are located at the access layer of the enterprise network and broadband IP metropolitan area network (MAN), providing different number of Ethernet ports. They can serve as the access equipment at the subscriber side in the information intelligent residential areas, commercial buildings, hotels, campus networks, enterprise (government) network or the convergence equipment of small-size network to provide fast, efficient, and cost-effective access and convergence solutions.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
32 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Functions The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S adopts the Store and Forward mode and supports the layer-2 switching at wire-speed. Full wire-speed switching is implemented at all ports.
The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S has the following functions:
1. MAC address self-learning capability. The size of the MAC address table is 8K.
2. Port MAC address bundling and address filtering.
3. Support the 802.1q-compliant VLAN and private border VLAN. The maximum number of VLANs can be up to 4094. The VLAN stacking function is also supported.
4. Priority classification by DA, SA, VID, or TOS/DSCP, multi-queue, fixed priority scheduling, weighted priority scheduling, and port multi-queue at the switch.
5. Support the STP defined in the 802.1d, RSTP defined in the 802.1w, and MSTP defined in the 802.1s.
6. Support LACP port bundling defined in 802.3ad and port static bundling. At most 16 port groups can be bundled and each group contains at most eight ports.
7. Multi-VLAN IGMP snooping.
8. Port ingress and egress mirroring.
9. 802.3x-compliant flow control (full duplex) and back-pressure flow control (half duplex).
10. Port ingress and egress bandwidth restriction.
11. Single port loop test.
12. VCT function and faulty circuit test.
13. Detailed port flow statistics.
14. Broadcast storm suppression.
15. Configuration of NM static route.
Chapter 2 - System Overview
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 33
16. 802.1x transparent transmission and authentication.
17. Support the Console configuration, Telnet remote login, SNMP network management, centralized network management of ZXNM01, trunking management technology ZGMP, and Secure shell V2.0.
18. Uploading and downloading of TFTP version.
Networking Mode The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S features flexible networking mode. The following introduces two typical network modes.
Workgroup Networking Mode The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S can be flexibly employed in workgroup-level networks like enterprise and department networks. The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S provides 8 to 48 10/100M interfaces and the number of interfaces can be extended through cascading of the switches. The extension slot can provide the 100M or 1000M high-speed optical interface to connect with backbone network or high-speed server.
Figure 1 shows the typical networking structure.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
34 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 1 TY P I C AL W O R K G R O U P N E T W O R K I N G S T R U C T U R E
IP backbone network 100M/1000M
10/100MServer
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
10/100M
10/100M
10/100M10/100M10/100M
10/100M
10/100MZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
MAN Broadband Access Networking Mode In the construction of broadband MAN, the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S can be equipped at the access layer of the residential blocks or the convergence layer of the buildings and directly provide 10/100M access of subscribers or connect to the switch at the access layer such as ZXR10 1816. With the flexible uplink port of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S, 100M/1000M optical interface can be configured to connect to the convergence node of the residential block and build a broadband service network for an information residential block together with the network management systems such as Broadband Access Server (BRAS), and AAA server.
Chapter 2 - System Overview
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 35
The ZAN (Customer Premises Network) equipment can be included via in-band or out-band mode into the NMS of the entire MAN, or managed with the network management and service management system independently established in the residential complex.
Figure 2 shows the typical networking structure.
F I G U R E 2 TY P I C AL N E T W O R K I N G O F MAN B R O AD B AN D AC C E S S
IP backbonenetwork
100M/1000M
Email/DNS/DHCP server
AAA server
100M
1000M ZXR10 2852S/2826S
ZXR10 3906
BRAS
100M10/100M 10/100M
N×10/100M
ZXR10 2826SZXR10 2609 ZXR10 2818S
Network/Propertymanagement server
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
36 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Technical Features and Parameters The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S is in compliance with the following standards:
Q/SZX 193-2005 ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch
Table 4 lists the techincal features and parameters of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S.
T AB L E 4 TE C H I N C AL FE AT U R E S AN D P AR A M E T E R S
Model Item
ZXR10 2609
ZXR10 2818S
ZXR10 2826S
ZXR10 2852S
Dimensions (HxWxD, mm)
35× 21× 130
43.6× 436× 200
43.6× 436× 200
43.6 × 442 × 280
Weight (Fully equipped, kg)
≈1 ≈2 ≈2 ≈2.5
Maximum power consumption (W)
7 9 14 19
Power supply AC power supply: 100V~240V, 48Hz~62Hz. Wave shape distortion <5% DC power supply: –57V to –40V
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 37
C h a p t e r 3
Structure & Principle
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Structure and working principles of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
System hardware structure of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
Working Principle The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S is a series of layer-2 NM-enabled low and medium-range Ethernet switching products launched by ZTE Corporation. They are intended for the access layer of the networks in the commercial buildings, residential areas, campus, and enterprise to meet users’ diversified requirements on the number of interfaces.
This series of products features powerful functions and outstanding performance. Functionally, the switch consists of control module, switching module, interface module, and power supply module. Figure 3 shows the system principle.
1. Control module: It consists of main processor and some external functional chips. The control module controls and manages the switching module to meet the requirements of different network applications. It provides an external serial port for the data operation and maintenance.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
38 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
2. Switching module. It consists of dedicated Ethernet switching processing chips. The switching module processes and exchanges the data packets sent by each port. In addition, the chip is integrated with data packet transceiver and can directly provide hundred megabit or gigabit service interface for users.
3. Interface module: It consists of interface board. (The interface module is used in the ZXR10 2818S and ZXR10 2826S only.) The interface module completes connection with external users and transceiving of data packets. The standard interface is used to connect the interface module and the switching module.
4. Power supply module. It adopts the 220V AC or –48V DC power supply. The power supply module supplies power for other modules of the system.
F I G U R E 3 ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S W O R K I N G P R I N C I P L E
Interface module(hundred megabit or
gigabit interface)Switching module
Control modulePower module
Hundredmegabit orgigabit serviceinterface of thecustomer
The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S (except the ZXR10 2609) uses the 19” subrack that is in compliance with the international
Chapter 3 - Structure & Principle
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 39
standard. The subrack can be used as standalone equipment or installed in a standard cabinet.
Hardware Structure The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S adopts the box structure, which is 1U high. It employs independent power supply and natural dissipation method. It has vents on the rear, right, and left sides of the box. The box is composed of a bottom case and a shell. It features light weight and simple structure. All the components or parts are installed on the bottom case, which allows easy installation and uninstallation. The interface board is inserted from the front side and is fixed with two captive screws. The insertion and removal is convenient and flexible.
On the front panel or the top of the shell of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S, there are power indicators, RUN indicators, fixed Ethernet electrical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces, and one serial configuration port. The AC or DC power socket and power switch are located on the rear panel.
The major hardware of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S is the Ethernet switching main board, which is indispensable in any type of configuration. The uplink port on the expansion slot of the ZXR10 2818S and ZXR102826S can be configured with different sub-boards as needed.
ZXR10 2609 Figure 4 shows the front panel of the ZXR10 2609.
F I G U R E 4 FR O N T P AN E L O F T H E ZXR10 2609
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
40 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The Ethernet switching main board of ZXR10 2609 is FEBN.
Interfaces ZXR10 2609 provides the following types of access ports:
1. Nine fixed 10/100 Base-T Ethernet ports. These ports support full duplex/half duplex and 10/100M and MDI/MDIX auto-sensing function. Except the 9th port, other ports are also equipped with VCT auto detection function.
2. One Console port, used to realize the management and configuration of various services.
Indicators There are 11 indicators on the top of the shell of the ZXR10 2609, including two system indicators and nine interface indicators.
1. The system indicators include power indicator (PWR) and running indicator (RUN). The following explains their status:
After the system is powered up, the PWR indicator is on and the RUN indicator is off.
The BootROM starts to load the version. If the version is unavailable, the states of indicators do not change. If the version is loaded normally, the RUN indicator flashes at 1Hz.
2. The nine interface indicators correspond to the nine fixed Ethernet electrical interfaces. When the indicator is on, it indicates that the LINK is normal. If the indicator is flashing, it indicates that data sending or receiving is underway.
ZXR10 2818S Figure 5 shows the front panel of the ZXR10 2818S.
Chapter 3 - Structure & Principle
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 41
F I G U R E 5 FR O N T P AN E L O F T H E ZXR10 2818S
The Ethernet switching main board of the ZXR10 2818S is FEBE. The ZXR10 2818S can also be configured with the following sub-boards: FFEI, FGEI, FGFI, and FGFE. For the description of the sub-boards, see Sub-boards.
Interfaces ZXR10 2818S provides the following types of access ports. They can be configured according to the actual application.
1. Sixteen fixed 10/100 Base-T Ethernet ports. These ports support full duplex/half duplex, 10/100M and MDI/MDIX auto-sensing function, and VCT auto detection function.
2. One expansion slot for the uplink sub-boards that can provide single/double-channel 100M optical interface, 2-channel 1000M optical interface, 2-channel 1000M electrical interface, or 1000M optical-electrical interface.
3. One Console port, used to realize the management and configuration of various services.
Indicators On the top of the shell and front panel of the ZXR10 2818S, there are 18 indicators, including 2 system indicators and 16 interface indicators. The indicators on the top of the shell and the front panel of the FEBE are the same.
1. The system indicators include power indicator (PWR) and running indicator (RUN). The following explains their states:
After the system is powered up, the PWR indicator is on and the RUN indicator is off.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
42 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The BootROM starts to load the version. If the version is unavailable, the states of indicators do not change. If the version is loaded normally, the RUN indicator flashes at 1Hz.
2. The 16 interface indicators correspond to the 16 fixed Ethernet electrical interfaces. When the indicator is on, it indicates that the LINK is normal. If the indicator is flashing, it indicates that data sending or receiving is underway.
ZXR10 2826S Figure 6 shows the front panel of the ZXR10 2826S.
F I G U R E 6 FR O N T P AN E L O F T H E ZXR10 2826S
The Ethernet switching main board of ZXR10 2818S is FEBT. The ZXR10 2818S can also be configured with the following sub-boards: FFEI, FGEI, FGFI, and FGFE. For introduction to the sub-boards, see Sub-boardsSub-boards.
Interfaces The ZXR10 2826S provides the following types of access ports. They can be configured flexibly according to the actual application.
1. Twenty four fixed 10/100 Base-T Ethernet ports. These ports support full duplex/half duplex, 10/100M and MDI/MDIX auto-sensing function, and VCT auto detection function.
2. One expansion slot for the uplink sub-boards that can provide single/double-channel 100M optical interface, 2-channel 1000M optical interface, 2-channel 1000M electrical interface, or 1000M optical-electrical interface.
Chapter 3 - Structure & Principle
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 43
3. One Console port, used to realize the management and configuration of various services.
Indicators On the front panel of the ZXR10 2826S, there are 50 indicators, including 2 system indicators and 48 interface indicators.
1. The system indicators include power indicator (PWR) and operation indicator (RUN). The following explains their states:
After the system is powered on, the PWR indicator is on and the RUN indicator is off.
The BootROM starts to load the version. If the version is unavailable, the states of indicators do not change. If the version is loaded normally, the RUN indicator flashes at 1Hz.
2. There are two indicators on each fixed Ethernet electrical port. The left one is the half/full duplex indicator and the right one is the link activation indicator.
The half/full duplex indicator is on when the Ethernet electrical port works in the full duplex mode, off when the Ethernet electrical port works in the half duplex mode, and flashes when there is conflict.
The link activation indicator flashes when the link is activated.
ZXR10 2852S Figure 7 shows the front panel of the ZXR10 2852S.
F I G U R E 7 FR O N T P AN E L O F T H E ZXR10 2852S
The Ethernet switching main board of the ZXR10 2852S is FEBF.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
44 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Interfaces ZXR10 2852S provides the following types of access ports. They can be configured flexibly according to the actual application.
1. Forty eight fixed 10/100 Base-T Ethernet ports. These ports support full duplex/half duplex, 10/100M and MDI/MDIX auto-sensing function, and VCT auto detection function.
2. Two fixed 10/100/1000 Ethernet electrical ports and two fixed 1000 Ethernet electrical ports.
3. One Console port, used to realize the management and configuration of various services.
Indicators On the front panel of the ZXR10 2852S, there are 56 indicators, including four system indicators and 52 interface indicators.
1. The system indicators include two CONSOLE port indicators, one power indicator (PWR), and one running indicator (RUN). The following explains their status:
After the system is powered up, the PWR indicator is on and the RUN indicator is off.
The BootROM starts to load the version. If the version is unavailable, the states of indicators do not change. If the version is loaded normally, the RUN indicator flashes at 1Hz.
2. The interface indicators include:
i. The 48 round indicators on the upper part of the front panel correspond to 48 fixed Ethernet electrical ports. When the indicator is on, it indicates that the LINK is normal. If the indicator is flashing, it indicates that data sending or receiving is underway.
ii. The ACT1 and ACT2 on the left correspond to two fixed gigabit optical interfaces. When the indicator is on, it indicates that the LIKK is normal. If the indicator is
Chapter 3 - Structure & Principle
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 45
flashing, it indicates that data sending or receiving is underway.
iii. Each fixed gigabit Ethernet port has two indicators. The left one is the half/full duplex indicator and the right one is the link activation indicator.
The half/full duplex indicator is on when the Ethernet electrical port works in the full duplex mode, off when the Ethernet electrical port works in the half duplex mode, and flashes when there is conflict.
The link activation indicator flashes when the link is activated.
Sub-boards The ZXR10 2816S and ZXR10 2826S can be configured with the following sub-boards according to the actual networking requirements: FFEI, FGEI, FGFI, and FGFE.
FFEI The FFEI provides one channel of 100M Ethernet uplink optical interface for the ZXR10 2818S/2826S. There are three FFEI models, providing different types of interface and transmission distance:
1. SF-1FE-S40KSC: Extend distance to 40 km over single-mode fiber cable. Figure 8 shows this sub-board.
F I G U R E 8 SF-1FE-S40KSC S U B -B O AR D
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
46 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
2. SF-1FE-S15KSC Extend distance to 15 km over single-mode fiber cable. Figure 9 shows this sub-board.
F I G U R E 9 SF-1FE-S15KSC S U B -B O AR D
3. SF-1FE-M02KSC Extend distance to 2 km over dual-mode fiber cable. Figure 10 shows this sub-board.
F I G U R E 10 SF-1FE-M02KSC S U B -B O AR D
On the front panel of FFEI, there are two indicators: link activation indicator (ACT) and link status indicator (LNK).
The ACT indicator flashes when data sending or receiving is underway.
The LNK indicator is on when the link is normal.
FGEI The FGEI provides two channels of gigabit Ethernet uplink electrical ports for the ZXR10 2818S/2826S. Its model number is SF-2GE-2RJ45, as shown in Figure 11.
Chapter 3 - Structure & Principle
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 47
F I G U R E 11 SF-2GE-2RJ45 S U B -B O AR D (FGEI )
On the panel of the FGEI, there are four indicators. Each gigabit electrical port has two indicators: link activation indicator and link status indicator
The link activation indicator flashes when data sending or receiving is underway.
The link status indicator is on when the link is normal.
FGFI The FGFI provides two channels of gigabit Ethernet uplink optical ports for the ZXR10 2818S/2826S. Its model number is SF-2GE-2SFP, as shown in Figure 12.
F I G U R E 12 SF-2GE-2SFP SU B -B O AR D (FGFI )
On the panel of the FGFI, there are two indicators: ACT1 and ACT2. They correspond to two gigabit optical interfaces. When the indicator is on, it indicates that the LIKK is normal. If the indicator is flashing, it indicates that data sending or receiving is underway.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
48 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FGFE The FGFE provides one channel of gigabit Ethernet uplink electrical port and one channel of gigabit Ethernet uplink optical port for the ZXR10 2818S/2826S. Its model number is SF-2GE-SFPRJ45, as shown in Figure 13.
F I G U R E 13 SF-2GE-SFPRJ45 S U B -B O AR D (FGFE)
On the panel of the FGFE, there are three indicators. The gigabit optical port has an ACT indicator. When the indicator is on, it indicates that the LIKK is normal. If the indicator is flashing, it indicates that data sending or receiving is underway. The gigabit electrical port has two indicators: link activation indicator and link status indicator.
The link activation indicator flashes when data sending or receiving is underway.
The link status indicator is on when the link is normal.
Power Supply Module ZXR10 2609 ZXR10 2609 supports two power supply modes: 110V/220V AC power supply and POE powered mode. When the AC power supply is used, the self-contained AC adapter can be directly used to convert the AC power into 5V DC power.
Chapter 3 - Structure & Principle
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 49
When the POE powered mode is used, a dedicated POE device is needed to split the RJ45 signals of the 48V power provided by the POE power sourcing equipment into Ethernet signal and 48V power signal and convert the power into 5V DC power needed by the ZXR10 2609.
ZXR10 2818S/2826S ZXR10 2818S/2826S supports two power supply modes: -48V DC power supply and 110V/220V AC power supply. When the -48V DC power supply is adopted, use the 48V DC power cables. When the AC power supply is adopted, use the AC power cables. Figure 14 and Figure 15 respectively show the rear panel of the swtich when the -48V DC power supply and 110V/220V AC power supply are adopted.
ZXR10 2818S also supports the POE power mode, but the powered device must be the first Ethernet port.
F I G U R E 14 R E AR P AN E L O F T H E ZXR10 2818S/2826S (DC P O W E R S U P P L Y )
GN
DP
-48VG
ND
-48V
F I G U R E 15 R E AR P AN E L O F T H E ZXR10 2818S/2826S (AC P O W E R S U P P L Y )
100-240V~ 60-50Hz
ZXR10 2852S ZXR10 2852S supports two power supply modes: -48V DC power supply and 110V/220V AC power supply. When the -48V DC power supply is adopted, use the 48V DC power cables. When the AC power supply is adopted, use the AC power cables. Figure 16 and
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
50 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Figure 17 respectively show the rear panel of the swtich when the -48V DC power supply and 110V/220V AC power supply are adopted.
F I G U R E 16 R E AR P AN E L O F T H E ZXR10 2852S (DC P O W E R S U P P L Y )
OFF ON
-48V
GN
DP
-48VGN
D
F I G U R E 17 R E AR P AN E L O F T H E ZXR10 2852S (AC P O W E R S U P P L Y )
OFF ON
100-240V~ 60-50Hz
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 51
C h a p t e r 4
Installation and Debugging
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Installation and debugging procedures of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
Installation of Cables
Cable Lightning Protection Requirements
Installing the Equipment The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S can be installed either on the desktop or a 19” standard cabinet (except the ZXR10 2609).
The 19” standard cabinet can be provided by the customer. If ZTE provides the cabinet, install the cabinet as per 19” Standard Cabinet Installation Manual.
Installing the Switch on Desktop If the switch is placed on the desktop, install four plastic feet (the plastic feet and screws are delivered with the switch) on the bottom plate of the switch. The four feet support the switch and form a lower air exhaust vent for the dissipation of the power supply module. Figure 18 shows the installation method.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
52 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 18 I N S T AL L I N G P L A S T I C FE E T
DC 5V Console 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ZXR10 2609
SF-2GE-2RJ45
ESDESDESD
ZXR10 2818SLNK/ACT
RUN
PWR
Console
14
119751 3
42 6 108 12
11513
16
753 9 151311
2 84 6 10 1612 14
12
11
ZXR10 2826S
ESD
PWR
RUN
42
31Console
86 10
975
181614
15 1713
2420 22
2119 23
SF-2GE-2RJ45
30/2950/49
ZXR10 2852S
CONSOLE
RX TX RXTX
2/1 4/3 6/5 14/138/7 10/9 12/11 18/17 20/19 22/2116/15 24/23 26/25 28/27 38/3736/3532/31 34/33 40/39 42/41 44/43 46/45 48/475152
1 - Box
2 - Foot
Installing the Switch onto a Cabinet To install the switch onto a 19” cabinet, two flanges should be installed on both sides of the box of the switch (the flanges and screws come with the equipment), as shown in Figure 19.
Chapter 4 - Installation and Debugging
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 53
F I G U R E 19 I N S T AL L I N G FL A N G E S
PWR
RUN
ZXR10 2818S
ESDESDESD10
LNK/ACT
862 4
31 5 7Console
42
3
16
13 151
12
9 11
14
12106 8
1195 7
14 16
13 15
SF-2GE-2RJ45
ZXR10 2826S
ESDRUN
PWR
Console 1 3 5 7 9 11
2 4 106 8 12
13 1715 2319 21
14 16 18 2220 24
SF-2GE-2RJ45
4/3
ZXR10 2852S
52
TX TXRX
CONSOLE 51 2/1
RX
50/49 34/3312/1110/98/76/5 16/15 18/1714/13 26/2524/2322/2120/19 32/3128/27 30/29 42/4140/3936/35 38/37 48/4746/4544/43
1 - Box
2 - Flange
3 - Screw
On both sides of the 19” cabinet, install two symmetric holders to support the switch, as shown in Figure 20.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
54 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 20 I N S T AL L I N G H O L D E R S
21
3
1 - Holder
2 - Cabinet
3 - Screw
After the holders are installed, push the switch along the holders and fix the flanges onto the cabinet, as shown in Figure 21.
Chapter 4 - Installation and Debugging
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 55
F I G U R E 21 F I X I N G E Q U I P M E N T
PWR
RUN
ZXR10 2818S
ESDESDESD10
LNK/ACT
862 4
31 5 7Console
42
3
16
13 151
12
9 11
14
12106 8
1195 7
14 16
13 15
SF-2GE-2RJ45
ZXR10 2826S
ESD
CONSOLE
TX
ZXR10 2852S
50/49
RX
51
RX TX
52 32/316/5 8/72/1 4/3 14/13 16/1510/9 12/11 24/2320/19 22/2118/17 30/2928/2726/25 38/3736/3534/33 44/43 46/4540/39 42/41 48/47
RUN
PWR
Console 1 3 5 7 9 11
2 4 106 8 12
13 1715 2319 21
14 16 18 2220 24
SF-2GE-2RJ45
1 Cabinet
2 Box
3 Screw
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
56 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Installation of Cables Cables of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S include power cables, configuration cables, network cables, and fibers.
Installing Power Cables Power cables are classified into AC power cables and DC power cables according to the type of power supply module:
1. Install AC power cables.
AC power cables look basically the same as the standard printer power cables, except that the core diameter is smaller. Figure 22 shows the AC power cable.
F I G U R E 22 AC P O W E R C AB L E
One end of the AC power cable is connected to the AC power socket on the AC power supply module of the ZXR10 2818S/2826S/2852S, and the other end to the 220V AC power socket.
For the ZXR10 2609, directly use the self-contained AC adapter connection equipment and socket.
2. Install DC power cables.
Figure 23 shows the –48 power socket on the DC power supply module of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S.
Chapter 4 - Installation and Debugging
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 57
F I G U R E 23 –48 P O W E R S O C K E T D
-48V
GN
D-4
8VG
ND
P
The DC power cable is a 3-core power cable, as shown in Figure 24.
F I G U R E 24 DC P O W E R C AB L E
Label
End AEnd B
Where, the plug is on end A. On end B:
The blue wire is connected to -48V power supply.
The brown wire is connected with -48VGND.
The yellow-green wire is connected with GNDP.
One end of the DC power cable is connected to the power socket on the DC power supply module of the ZXR10 2818S/2826S/2852S, and the other end to the corresponding terminal of –48V DC power supply.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
58 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Installing Configuration Cables The serial port configuration cable is used for the configuration and routine maintenance of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S.
The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S is delivered with serial port configuration cable. One end of the cable is a DB9 serial port, which is connected with the serial port on the computer. The other end is an RJ45 port, which is connected to the Console port on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S. Figure 25 shows the appearance of a configuration cable and Table 5 provides the cable pinout.
F I G U R E 25 S E R I AL P O R T C O N F I G U R AT I O N C AB L E
Magnified view of end A
T AB L E 5 P I N O U T O F S E R I AL P O R T C O N F I G U R AT I O N C AB L E
End A Color End B
2 White 3
3 Blue 6
White 4 5
Orange 5
4 White 7
6 Green 2
7 White 8
8 Brown 1
Chapter 4 - Installation and Debugging
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 59
Installing Network Cables Both ends of the network cable are crimped with RJ45 connectors, as shown in Figure 26.
Name of the cable connector: 8P8C straight cable crimping connector
Model: E5088-001023
Technical parameters: Rated current 1.5A, rated voltage 125V, and crimping round wire AWG24-28#.
F I G U R E 26 S T R U C T U R E O F N E T W O R K C AB L E
End A
By the sequence of crimping the lines in the connector, the cables can be classified into:
Straight-through cable RJ45, with one-to-one connection correspondence at two ends of the cable. The specific pinout is shown in Table 6.
T AB L E 6 RJ45 P I N O U T O F S T R AI G H T -T H R O U G H C AB L E
A End Cable Colors B End
1 White/orange 1
2 Orange 2
3 White/green 3
6 Green 6
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
60 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
A End Cable Colors B End
4 Blue 4
5 White/blue 5
7 White/brown 7
8 Brown 8
Crossover cable RJ45J with two twisted pairs at two ends of the cable corresponding to each other in the crossover mode. The specific pinout is shown in Table 7.
T AB L E 7 RJ45J P I N O U T O F C R O S S O V E R C AB L E
A End Cable Colors B End
1 White/orange 3
2 Orange 6
3 White/green 1
6 Green 2
4 Blue 4
5 White/blue 5
7 White/brown 7
8 Brown 8
Installing Fibers Each optical port of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S is connected to two fibers: one for receiving and one for transmission. They are respectively marked as TX and RX on the panel. Note not to mis-insert the fibers. Fibers are classified into single-mode and multi-mode fibers. You can configure 6 types of fibers as listed in Table 8 according to your application requirements.
Chapter 4 - Installation and Debugging
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 61
T AB L E 8 F I B E R TY P E S
Mode Type of Connector on the Switch
Type of Connector on the Peer End
FC/PC connector
SC/PC connector Single-mode fiber
SC-PC connector (square and flat head)
ST/PC connector
FC/PC connector
SC/PC connector multi-mode fiber
SC-PC connector (square and flat head)
ST/PC connector
For fiber layout out of the cabinet, make sure to protect the fibers against any damages with plastic corrugated protection tubes. Optical fibers inside the protection tube should not entangle with one another, and they shall be bent into a round shape at the bending position, if any. The labels at the two ends of the optical fiber shall be clear and legible. The meanings of the labels shall clearly reflect the corresponding numbers and relationship between cabinets and between rows.
Labels 1. The pattern and meanings of the labels attached to the
connector
The label attached to the connector is called transverse English label on panels and connectors. Figure 27 shows the structure and dimensions of the label.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
62 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 27 TR AN S V E R S E E N G L I S H L AB E L O N P AN E L S A N D C O N N E C T O R S
Meanings of the contents on the labels are as follows:
RJ45——Cable code
Port A——End A of the cable connector, corresponding to End B or another end.
5m——Length of the finished cable. It refers to the straight line length of the cable from the connector at one end to the connector at the other end.
TIC 10/100Base-T 1——Connection position, the first 10/100Base-T network port of the TIC board.
2. The pattern and meanings of the label attached to the cable
The label attached to the cable is called roll-type self-cover laser print label model II. Figure 28 shows the structure and dimensions of the label.
Chapter 4 - Installation and Debugging
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 63
F I G U R E 28 R O L L -T Y P E S E L F-C O V E R L AS E R P R I N T L AB E L M O D E L I I
Transparent area
Printable area
Transparent area
HD182 Port B 1.30m#1-L5-DTI1 D25~32
The contents of the label in the above figure have the same meanings as those of the label in Figure 27. These two types of label are used in different places. The transverse English label on panels and connectors is only applicable to the connectors where the attachment area is larger than the label area or to panels. The roll-up self-mulching laser printing label is rolled around the cable with its own scotch adhesive tapes. It is used when the horizontal English label cannot be used because the cable connector is small or the cable does not look nice with a horizontal English label.
3. Before the cabinet equipment is delivered, all the internal interconnected cables shall be attached with flag-type direction labels.
This label attached to the cable is called Transverse English Type I Label. Figure 29 shows the structure and dimensions of the label. The contents of the label in the above figure have the same meanings as those of the label in Figure 27
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
64 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 29 TR AN S V E R S E E N G L I S H TY P E I L AB E L
4. The meaning of the content and the structure of a fiber engineering label are as shown in Figure 30.
F I G U R E 30 P AT T E R N AN D M E AN I N G S O F T H E E N G I N E E R I N G L AB E L O N T H E OP T I C AL F I B E R
Optical fible(R) Optical fible(L)
Layer No.Serial No.Row No.
Rack No.
Fill in theODF.
Row No.Serial No.Column No
The side marked with"L" must be filled in
The side marked with"R" must be filled in
The two sides of the engineering label on the optical fiber are marked “L” and “R” with the specific meanings as follows:
When the label is pasted on the fiber at the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S side, the row number and column number of the cabinet at the side of the connected remote optical interface device as well as the layer No. of the fiber in
Chapter 4 - Installation and Debugging
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 65
the cabinet and the fiber No. should be filled in the R area of the label. In this case, the row No. and column No. of ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S where the fiber is located as well as the layer No. of the fiber and fiber number shall be filled in the L area of the label.
If the label is attached on the optical interface equipment of the customer, contents filled on the label are just contrary to those at the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S side.
Cable Lightning Protection Requirements According to the degree of hazard, lightning is classified into direct lightning strike and lightning induction. The damage of direct lightning strike is hard to avoid. But proper lightning protection measure can effectively prevent the lightning induction. The following lightning protection requirements are proposed to reduce the equipment failure rate in the areas where lightning is frequent.
1. The Ethernet switch shall be placed in the corridor, preferably on the first floor. To avoid the direct sunshine, rains, and lightning, the switch cannot stay in an outdoor place where no weather-proof measures are taken. Ensure that all subscriber lines, except the uplink, downlink, and cascading lines, are distributed inside the building to avoid the attack of lightning induction.
Figure 31 shows the cabling of Ethernet switch in a four-floor building with three units. Where, switch A in Unit 1 is the convergence switch of the whole building, and switches B and C are access switches. Switches A, B, and C are cascaded. That is, the cascading cable of switch A is the uplink cable of switch B, and the cascading cable of switch B is the uplink cable of switch C. The rest subscriber lines are distributed inside the building and connected to the subscriber terminals from bottom to top in the corridor.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
66 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 31 C AB L I N G O F T H E E T H E R N E T S W I T C H I N A B U I L D I N G
...
5
7
21
3 4
6
8
... ...Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3
1st floor
4st floor
3st floor
2st floor
Uplink cable Cascading cable Cascading cableA CB
Corridor CorridorCorridor
Switch
Switch
Switch
In the above figure, 1 to 8 stands for subscribers. The cascading cable refers to the cable connecting two switches.
2. Reinforced lightning protection measures must be taken and lightning protection bars must be added for the uplink, downlink, and cascading Ethernet ports that are led outdoors. In special case when the common subscriber lines must be distributed outdoors, lightning protection bars must also be added. The lightning protection capability of the lightning protection bar must reach 6 KV or above and the current discharge capability must reach 5 KA. The grounding cable of the lightning protection bar must have a diameter of 16 mm2 and a length less than 30 cm. It is recommended to use the optical port as the uplink port of the convergence switch in the building. If the electrical port is used, lightning protection bars must be added.
Chapter 4 - Installation and Debugging
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 67
Figure 32 shows the cabling of a convergence switch. Where, the uplink port is the optical port and lightning protection bars are added for the downlink or cascaded cables. The lightning bars are connected to the earth through the shell. The rest subscriber lines are distributed inside the building.
F I G U R E 32 C AB L I N G O F A C O N V E R G E N C E S W I T C H
。。。
Uplink cable(optical interface)
Uplink cable orcascading cable
Shell ground
Subscriber line
Less than 30 cmLightningprotection bar
Ethernet switch
3. The grounding system with good ground grid is preferred for the switch. A lot of residential buildings with proper grounding have a grounding resistance of 1 ohm. If the test shows that grounding system is not satisfied, it is recommended to equip an independent grounding post and the grounding cable must be 16 mm2 in diameter and as short as possible. Whichever grounding method is used, the grounding resistance must be less than 5 ohm and cannot exceed 10 ohm.
4. It is prohibited that the switch directly gets the power from the outdoor overhead power cable. If the switch must directly get the power from the outdoor overhead power cable, special lightning protection measures, such as lightning protection socket and lightning protection bar, must be added to the power supply. The lightning
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
68 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
protection bar for the power supply must have better lightning protection index than that for the port cable.
5. Whether the Ethernet switch will suffer lightning strike is affected by a lot of factors, including grounding, power supply, and wiring. The lightning strike lead-in mechanism also varies a lot. Taking one measure is far from enough to prevent the lightning strike. Therefore, several measures must be implemented at the same time. Proper grounding, appropriate power supply, reasonable wiring, and suitable lightning protection measures will definitely reduce the chance of the switch damage resulted from lighting strike.
System Debugging Connection Configuration The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S debugging is implemented through the Console. The Console port connection configuration adopts the VT100 terminal mode. The following takes the configuration of HyperTerminal provided by the Windows operating system as an example.
1. Connect the PC to the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S. Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Communication > HyperTerminal to connect the HyperTerminal, as shown in Figure 33.
Chapter 4 - Installation and Debugging
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 69
F I G U R E 33 C R E AT I N G A C O N N E C T I O N
2. Select COM1 or COM2 according to the serial port connected to the configuration cable. See Figure 34.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
70 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 34 C O N N E C T I O N C O N F I G U R AT I O N I N F O R M AT I O N
3. Set the attributes of the selected serial port, as shown in Figure 35. Port attribute settings include the following contents:
Baud rate: 9600
Data bit: 8
Parity: None
Stop bit: 1
Data flow control: None
Chapter 4 - Installation and Debugging
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 71
F I G U R E 35 P O R T AT T R I B U T E S E T T I N G S
Check that all settings are correct. Then power on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S to initialize the system and then enter the configuration mode.
Power-on Procedure Before powering on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S, check the environment in the equipment room and the hardware installation.
1. Check whether the temperature, humidity, and voltage of the power supply in the equipment room meet the requirements listed in Table 9.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
72 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
T AB L E 9 TE M P E R AT U R E AN D H U M I D I T Y TAB L E
Temperature (oC) Relative Humidity (%)
Check Item
Long-term Working Condition (note 1)
Short-term Working Condition (note 2)
Long Term Operating Condition
Short Term Operating Condition
Range 15°C to 30°C -5°C to 45°C 30% to 70%
20% to 90%
Notes: In normal working environment of the ZXR10
2609/2818S/2826S/2852S, the temperature and humidity are measured 2m above the floor and 0.4m in front of the equipment when the front and rear protection boards are removed.
The short-term working condition means that the continuous running period is no more than 48 hours, and the accumulated running period in a year is no more than 15 days.
2. Check whether the power cables and other cables are correctly and reliably connected.
3. Check other hardware conditions.
i. Equipment labels shall be complete, correct and legible.
ii. Equipment is installed reliably in the 19” standard cabinet.
iii. The power switch of the equipment is turned off.
iv. The rack is properly grounded, with the grounding resistance meeting relevant technical requirements.
To power on the ZXR10 2852S, do as follows:
1. Turn on the external power supply.
2. Turn on the power switch at the back of the switch.
Chapter 4 - Installation and Debugging
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 73
To power on the ZXR10 2609\2818S\2826S, do as follows:
1. Connect the power cable at the back of the Ethernet switch.
2. Turn on the external power supply.
The power-down procedure is on contrary to the power-on procedure.
To power down the ZXR10 2852S, do as follows:
1. Turn off the power switch at the back of the switch.
2. Turn off the external power supply.
To power down the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, do as follows:
1. Turn off the external power supply.
2. Remove the power cable at the back of the Ethernet switch.
Indicator Status After the switch is powered on, the system indicators change in the following way:
1. After the system is powered on, the PWR indicator is on and the RUN indicator is off.
2. The BootROM starts to load the version. If the version is unavailable, the states of indicators do not change. If the version is loaded normally, the RUN indicator flashes at 1 Hz.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
74 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
System Boot Procedure The procedure to start the system is as follows:
After the system is powered on, start the hardware. After the hardware test is passed, the following information appears on the management terminal:
Welcome to use ZTE eCarrier!!
Copyright(c) 2004-2006, ZTE Co., Ltd.
System Booting......
CPU: WindBond ARM7TDMI
Version: VxWorks5.5.1
BSP version: 1.2/0
Creation date: May 23 2005, 00:07:21
Press any key to stop auto-boot...
7
After the above information appears, wait for about 7 seconds and then press any key to enter the boot status. Then modify the startup parameters. If the system does not detect any input within the specified time, the system begins to automatically load the version and displays the following information:
auto-booting...
boot device : wbdEnd
unit number : 1
processor number : 0
Chapter 4 - Installation and Debugging
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 75
host name : tiger
file name : vxWorks
inet on ethernet (e) : 10.40.89.106
host inet (h) : 10.40.89.78
gateway inet (g) : 10.40.89.78
flags (f) : 0x80
Attaching to TFFS... done.
Loading file :kernel
Uncompressing...
Uncompressed 2310452 bytes Ok.
Loading image... 7018512
Starting at 0x108000...
(Omitted)
Welcome !
ZTE Corporation.
All rights reserved.
login :
After the system is started successfully, the prompt character “login:” is displayed, requesting you to input the login user name and password. The default user name is admin and password is zhongxing.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 76
This page is intentionally blank.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 77
C h a p t e r 5
Usage and Operation
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Common configuration methods of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
Command mode of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
Command line usage of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
Configuration Modes The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S provides several configuration modes. As shown in Figure 36, you can select a configuration mode according to the network connected.
1. Configuration through serial port connection
2. Configuration through TELNET session
3. Configuration through SNMP connection
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
78 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 36 ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S C O N F I G U R AT I O N M O D E S
FTP/TFTP server
Telnet hostSNMP network
management system
HyperTerminal
Serial port
ZXR10
Configuration Through Console Port Connection Configuration through console port connection is the main configuration mode of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S. For the operation procedure, refer to Connection. You can also configure the connection when the equipment is running.
Configuration Through TELNET Session Telnet mode is often used for configuring a remote switch. You can log in to the remote switch through the Ethernet port of the local host. The login username and password must be configured on the switch and you can ping the IP address of the layer 3 port on the switch successfully on the local host. (For configuration of IP address of the layer 3 port, see Layer 3 Configuration.)
Use the command create user to create a user and the same command to set the login password.
Chapter 5 - Usage and Operation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 79
Note: The default username is admin and the password is zhongxing.
Suppose the IP address of the layer 3 port is 192.168.3.1 and this address can be pinged from the local host. Then perform the remote configuration as follows:
1. Run the Telnet command on the host, as shown in Figure 37.
F I G U R E 37 R U N T H E TE L N E T
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
80 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
2. Click OK. A Telnet window appears, as shown in Figure 38.
F I G U R E 38 SW I T C H R E M O T E LO G I N WI N D O W
3. Enter the username and password to enter the user mode of the switch.
Configuration Through SNMP Connection Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the most popular network management protocol. You can use one NM server to manage all the equipment on the network through this protocol.
SNMP adopts the server/client-based management mode. The background NM server serves as an SNMP server, and the foreground network equipment. The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S serves as the SNMP client. The
Chapter 5 - Usage and Operation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 81
foreground and background share the same MIB management database and communicate with each other via the SNMP.
The background NM server must be installed with the NM software that supports SNMP. The management and configuration of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S are implemented through the NM software. For the SNMP configuration on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S, refer to SNMP.
Command Mode To facilitate the configuration and management of the switch, the commands of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/28502S are allocated to different modes according to the functions and authorities. A command can be executed only in the specified mode. The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S command modes include:
1. User mode
2. Global configuration mode
3. SNMP configuration mode
4. Layer 3 configuration mode
5. File system configuration mode
6. NAS configuration mode
7. Cluster management configuration mode
User Mode When you log in to the switch through the HyperTerminal or Telnet, you can enter the user mode after entering the login username and password. The prompt character in the user mode is the host name followed by “>”, as shown below:
zte>
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
82 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The default host name is zte. You can modify the host name by using the command hostname.
In the user mode, you can execute the command exit to exit the switch configuration or execute the command show to display the
system configuration and operation information.
Note: The command Show can be executed in any mode.
Global Configuration Mode In the user mode, enter the enable command and the corresponding password to enter the global configuration mode, as follows:
zte>enable
password :****
zte(cfg)#
In the global configuration mode, you can configure various functions of the switch. Thus, you need to use the command adminpass to set the password for entering the global configuration mode to prevent the login of unauthorized users.
To return to the user mode from the global configuration mode, use the exit command.
SNMP Configuration Mode In the global configuration mode, you can use the command config snmp to enter the SNMP configuration mode, as shown below:
zte(cfg)#config snmp
zte(cfg-OSPF)#?
Chapter 5 - Usage and Operation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 83
In the SNMP configuration mode, you can set the SNMP and RMON parameters.
To return to the global configuration mode from the SNMP configuration mode, use the command exit or press Ctrl+Z.
Layer 3 Configuration Mode In the global configuration mode, execute the command config router to enter the Layer 3 configuration mode, as shown in the following example:
zte(cfg)#config router
zte(cfg-OSPF)#?
In the Layer 3 configuration mode, you can configure the Layer 3 port, static router, and ARP entities.
To return to the global configuration mode from the Layer 3 configuration mode, use the command exit or press Ctrl+Z.
File System Configuration Mode In the global configuration mode, execute the command config tffs to enter the file system configuration mode, as shown below:
zte(cfg)#config tffs
zte(cfg-typenum)#
In the file system configuration mode, you can operate on the switch file system, including adding file directory, deleting file or directory, modifying file name, displaying file or directory, changing file directory, uploading/downloading files through TFTP, copying files, formatting Flash, and so on.
To return to the global configuration mode from the file system configuration mode, use the command exit or press Ctrl+Z.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
84 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
NAS Configuration Mode In the global configuration mode, execute the command config nas to enter the NAS configuration mode, as shown below:
zte(cfg)#config nas
zte(cfg-OSPF)#?
In the NAS configuration mode, you can configure the switch access service, including the user access authentication and management.
To return to the global configuration mode from the NAS configuration mode, use the command exit or press Ctrl+Z.
Cluster Management Configuration Mode In the global configuration mode, execute the command config group to enter the cluster management configuration mode, as shown below:
zte(cfg)#config group
zte(cfg-OSPF)#?
In the cluster management configuration mode, you can configure the switch cluster management service.
To return to the global configuration mode from the cluster management configuration mode, use the command exit or press Ctrl+Z.
Chapter 5 - Usage and Operation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 85
Usage of Command Line Online Help In any command mode, enter a question mark (?) behind the DOS prompt of the system, a list of available commands in the command mode will appear. You can use the online help to get keywords and parameter list of any command.
1. In any command mode, enter a question mark "?" behind the DOS prompt of the system, and a list of all commands in the mode and the brief description of the commands will appear. For example:
zte>?
enable enable configure mode
exit exit from user mode
help Description of the interactive help
system
show show config information
zte>
2. Input a question mark behind a character or string, commands or a list of keywords starting with the character or string can be displayed. Note that there is no space between the character (string) and the question mark. For example:
zte(cfg)#?
config clear create
zte(cfg)#
3. Input a question mark behind a command, a keyword or a parameter, the next keyword or parameter to be input will be listed, and also a brief explanation will be given. Note
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
86 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
that a space must be entered before the question mark. For example:
zte(cfg)#?
snmp enter SNMP config mode
router enter router config mode
tffs enter file system config mode
nas enter nas config mode
group enter group management config
mode
zte(cfg)#
4. If you enter a wrong command, keyword, or parameter and press Enter, the message “Command not found” will be displayed on the interface. For example:
zte(cfg)#conf ter
% Command not found (0x40000066)
zte(cfg)#
In the following example, the online help is used to help create a username.
zte(cfg)#?
create
zte(cfg)#?
port create descriptive name for port
vlan create descriptive name for vlan
user create user
zte(cfg)#create user
% Parameter not enough (0x40000071)
zte(cfg)#create user ?
<name> user name
zte(cfg)#create user wangkc
Chapter 5 - Usage and Operation
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 87
zte(cfg)#
Command Abbreviations In the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S, a command or keyword can be shortened into a character or string that can uniquely identify this command or keyword. For example, the command exit can be shortened as ex, and the command show port shortened as sh po.
History Command The user interface supports the function of recording input commands. A maximum of 20 history commands can be recorded. The function is very useful in re-invoking of a long or complicated command.
To re-invoke a command from the record buffer, do one of the following.
Press… To…
Ctrl+P or Recover the last command (Roll back in the historical records of commands)
Ctrl+N or Recover the next command (Roll forward in the historical records of commands)
Functional Key The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S provides a lot of functional keys for the user interface to facilitate user operations. Table 10 lists the functional keys.
T AB L E 10 FU N C T I O N AL K E Y S
Functional Key Usage
Ctrl-P or Recover the last command (Roll back in the historical
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
88 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Functional Key Usage
records of commands).
Ctrl-N or Recover the next command (Roll forward in the historical records of commands).
Ctrl-B or Move left in the command line currently indicated by the prompt.
Ctrl-F or Move right in the command line where the prompt is currently located.
Tab Display commands starting with the character or string. If there is only one command, make this command a complete one.
Ctrl-A Skip to the beginning of the command line.
Ctrl-E Skip to the end of the command line.
Ctrl-K Delete the characters from the cursor to the end.
Ctrl-H or Backspace Delete the character on the left of the cursor.
Ctrl-C Cancel the command and display the prompt character.
Ctrl-L Clear screen.
Ctrl-Y Recover the last command executed.
Ctrl-Z Return to the global configuration mode.
When the command output exceeds one page, the output is split into several pages automatically and the prompt “----- more ----- Press Q or Ctrl+C to break -----” appears at the bottom of the current page. You can press any key to turn pages or press Q or Ctrl+C to stop the output.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 89
C h a p t e r 6
System Management
In this chapter, you will learn about:
File System Management
File system and related operations
TFTP Configuration
Import and Export of Configuration
Backup and Recovery of Files
Software Version Upgrade
File System Management File system Introduction In the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S, the FLASH memory is the major storage device. Both the version file and configuration file of the switch are saved in the FLASH memory. Operations, such as version upgrading and configuration saving, should be conducted in the FLASH memory.
The name of the version file is kernel.z.
The name of the configuration file is running.cfg.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
90 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
File System Operations The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S provides a lot commands for file system operations. The frequently-used commands include:
1. Enter the file system configuration mode.
config tffs
2. Create a directory.
md
3. Delete a file or directory.
remove
4. Renaming a File
rename
5. Modify the current directory.
cd
6. Display the current directory list.
ls
7. Upload or download a version through TFTP.
tftp
8. Copy a file.
copy
9. Format the FLASH memory.
format
Chapter 6 - System Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 91
TFTP Configuration The switch version file and configuration file can be backed up or restored by using TFTP. The TFTP server application software is started at the background to communicate with the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S (TFTP client) to implement the file backup and recovery.
In the following, the FTP Server software "tftpd" is taken as an example to describe the configuration of the background FTP Server.
1. Run the tftpd software at the background host. The interface as shown in Figure 39 appears.
F I G U R E 39 TFTPD S E R V E R I N T E R F AC E
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
92 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
2. Click Tftpd90 > Configure. In the dialog box that appears, click Browse and select the directory for the version file or configuration file, for example, D:\IMG.
Figure 40 shows the dialog box after the setting is completed.
F I G U R E 40 TF T P D S E T T I N G S D I AL O G B O X
3. Click the first Browse to select the home directory for the version file or configuration file, for example, G:\Switch. Click the second Browse to select the file. Click OK to complete the setting.
After the TFTP configuration is completed, you can perform the TFTP operations on the switch. For details, see the later sections.
Chapter 6 - System Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 93
Import and Export of Configuration The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S provides the import and export functions of configuration information, which makes it easy to configure and manage the switch.
1. Export the configuration information.
You can use the command show running-config toFile to export the execution result of show running-config to a config.txt and save it in the FLASH memory. This file can also be uploaded to the TFTP server for viewing.
zte(cfg-tffs)#tftp 192.168.1.102 upload config.txt
2. Import the configuration information.
You can use the command readconfig to read the configuration commands in the config.txt in the FLASH and send them to the switch for resolution and execution. Contents of the config.txt can be edited manually as needed and then downloaded to the switch by using the command tftp.
zte(cfg-tffs)#tftp 192.168.1.102 download config.txt
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
94 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Note: It is recommended to use the command readconfig when the switch configuration is null. If the configuration command in the config.txt conflicts with the existing one of the switch, execution of the command in the config.txt will encounter errors and abort.
When manually editing the config.txt, note the execution sequence of commands. (Some commands follow a certain sequence upon execution). Otherwise, the execution of readconfig may encounter errors and abort when a certain command in the config.txt is read.
Backup and Recovery of Files The files mentioned here refer to the configuration file and version file in the FLASH memory.
1. Back up the configuration file.
When a command is used to modify the switch configuration, the data is running in the memory in real time. When the switch is restarted, all the contents newly configured will be lost. Thus, you need to execute the command saveconfig to save the current configuration into the FLASH memory. The following shows the saveconfig command:
zte(cfg)#saveconfig
To prevent damage to the configuration data, back up the configuration data using the command tftp.
Chapter 6 - System Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 95
The following command can be used to back up a configuration file in the FLASH memory to the background TFTP Server:
zte(cfg-tffs)#tftp 192.168.1.102 upload running.cfg
You can also use the command show running-config toFile to write the configuration information into the config.txt and then back up the file to the TFTP server. For detailed method, refer to Import and Export of Configuration.
2. Recover the configuration file.
You can execute the following command to download the configuration file in the background TFTP server to the FLASH memory:
zte(cfg-tffs)#tftp 192.168.1.102 download running.cfg
3. Back up the version file.
Similar to the configuration file, you can use the command tftp to upload the foreground version file to the background TFTP server. For example:
zte(cfg-tffs)#tftp 192.168.1.102 upload kernel.z
4. Recover the version file.
Version file recovery is used to retransmit the background backup version file to the foreground through TFTP. Recovery is very important in the case of upgrade failure. The version recovery operation is basically the same with the version upgrade procedure. For details, refer to Software Version Upgrade.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
96 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Software Version Upgrade Normally, version upgrading is needed only when the original version does not support some functions or the equipment cannot run normally due to some special reasons. Improper version upgrade operation may result in upgrade failure and startup failure of the system. Therefore, before version upgrading, the maintenance personnel shall be familiar with the principles and operations of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S and master the upgrading procedure.
Version upgrade can be carried out in one of the following cases: When the operation of switch system is normal and when the operation of the switch system is abnormal.
Viewing the Version Information If the system state allows, check the version information before and after the upgrade.
In the global configuration mode, you can execute the command version to display the system hardware and software version information.
The displayed contents are as follows:
zte(cfg)#
The System's Hardware Info:
Switch's Mac Address: 00.d0.d0.f0.12.23
Module 0 : ZXR10 2818s; fasteth: 16; gbit : 0;
The System's Software Info:
Version number : 1.0
version make date : May 30 2005
version make time : 09:24:51
Chapter 6 - System Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 97
System has run 0 years 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 52
seconds
zte(cfg)#
Version Upgrade When the System is Normal If the switch runs normally, upgrade the version as follows:
1. Connect Console port of the switch to the serial port of the background host using the self-contained configuration cable. Connect an Ethernet port of the switch to the network port of the background host using a network cable. Check whether the connections are correct.
2. Set the IP address of the Ethernet port on the switch. Set the IP address of the background host used for upgrade. The two IP addresses must be in the same network segment so that the host can ping the switch.
3. On the background host, start the TFTP server software and set the TFTP server as per instructions in
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
98 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
TFTP Configuration.
4. On the switch, use the command version to check the information of current operating version.
5. Enter the file system configuration mode and execute the command remove to delete the old version file in the FLASH memory. If the FLASH memory has sufficient space, change the name of the old version file and keep it in the FLASH memory.
zte(cfg)#config tffs
zte(cfg-tffs)#remove kernel.z
6. Use the command tftp to upgrade the version. The following shows how to download the version file from the TFTP server to the FLASH memory:
zte(cfg-tffs)#tftp 192.168.1.102 download kernel.z
........................................................
..................................................
1,979,157 bytes downloaded
zte(cfg-typenum)#
7. Restart the switch. After successful startup, check the version under running and confirm whether the upgrading is successful.
Version Upgrade When the System is Abnormal When the switch cannot be started normally or runs abnormally, upgrade the version as follows:
1. Connect Console port of the switch to the serial port of the background host using the self-contained configuration cable. Connect an Ethernet port of the switch to the
Chapter 6 - System Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 99
network port of the background host using a network cable. Check whether the connections are correct.
2. Restart the switch. At the HyperTerminal, press any key as prompted to enter the [VxWorks Boot] state.
Welcome to use ZTE eCarrier!!
Copyright(c) 2004-2006, ZTE Co., Ltd.
System Booting......
CPU: WindBond ARM7TDMI
Version: VxWorks5.5.1
BSP version: 1.2/0
Creation date: Jul 29 2005, 09:05:12
Press any key to stop auto-boot...
5
[ZxR10 Boot]:
3. Enter c in the [ZxR10 Boot] state and press Enter to enter the parameter modification status. Set the IP addresses of the Ethernet port and the TFTP server. Generally, these two addresses are set to the same network segment.
[ZxR10 Boot]: c
'.' = clear field; '-' = go to previous field; ^D =
quit
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
100 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
boot device : wbdEnd1 */Use the default value./*
processor number: 0 */ Use the default value./*
host name : tiger */Use the default value./*
file name : vxWorks */Use the default value./*
inet on ethernet (e) : 10.40.89.106 */ IP address of
the Ethernet port /*
inet on backplane (b): */Use the default value./*
host inet (h) : 10.40.89.78 */IP address of the
TFTP server/*
gateway inet (g) : 10.40.89.78 */Use the default
value./*
user (u) :(Use the default value)
ftp password (pw) (blank = use rsh): (Use the default
value)
flags (f) : 0x80 */Use the default value./*
target name (tn) : */Use the default value./*
startup script (s) : */Use the default value./*
other (o) : */Use the default value./*
[ZxR10 Boot]:
4. Set the IP address of the background host as the same with the IP address of the above TFTP server.
5. Start the TFTP server software on the background server and configure the TFTP server as per description in
Chapter 6 - System Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 101
TFTP Configuration.
6. In the [ZxR10 Boot] state, input zte to enter the [BootManager] state of the switch. Input ? to display the command list for this state.
[ZxR10 Boot]: zte
Load wbdEnd Begin
W90N740 MAC0: 10MB - Full Duplex
Board 2818s !
Marvell has been initialized !
boot device : wbdEnd
unit number : 0
processor number : 0
host name : tiger
file name : vxWorks
inet on ethernet (e) : 10.40.89.106
host inet (h) : 10.40.89.78
gateway inet (g) : 10.40.89.78
flags (f) : 0x80
Attached TCP/IP interface to wbdEnd0.
Warning! no netmask specified.
Attaching network interface lo0... done.
Attaching to TFFS...
test flash passed perfectly!
Welcome to boot manager!
Type for help
[BootManager]:?
ls */Display the current
directory list./*
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
102 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
pwd */Display the current
absolution path. /*
devs */Display the FLASH
information. /*
show */Display the switch type and
mac address./*
reboot */Restart the switch./*
format */Format the FLASH./*
del file_name */Delete the specified
file./*
md dir_name */Create a directory./*
mf file_name */Create a file./*
cd absolue-pathname */Change the current
directory./*
tftp ip_address file_name */Download/upload a version
file through TFTP /*
update file_name */Upgrade boot/*
rename file_name newname */Rename the file./*
[BootManager]:
7. In the [BootManager] state, use the command tftp to upgrade the version. The following shows how to download the version file from the TFTP server to the FLASH memory:
[BootManager]:tftp 10.40.89.78 kernel.z
Loading... done!
[BootManager]:ls
RUNNING.CFG
KERNEL.Z
[BootManager]:
Chapter 6 - System Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 103
In the [BootManager] state, execute the command reboot to restart the switching by using the new version. If the switch is started normally, use the command version to check whether the new version is running in the memory. If the switch cannot be started normally, it indicates the version upgrade fails. In this case, repeat the above upgrade procedure.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 104
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 105
C h a p t e r 7
Service Configuration
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Configuration methods for various services of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
Port Configuration Basic Configuration On the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S, you can configure the following port parameters: auto negotiation, duplex mode, rate, flow control, port priority, MAC address number restriction, and so on.
Port parameters are configured in the global configuration mode. The configuration includes the following contents:
1. Set the port status.
set port
2. Set the port auto-sensing function.
set port auto
The auto-sensing function is enabled by default. After the duplex mode or rate of the port is set, the auto-sensing function is disabled automatically.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
106 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
3. Set the duplex mode of the port.
set port duplex
For all the Ethernet optical port and the Ethernet electrical port working at 1000 Mbps, the duplex mode can only be full duplex and cannot be changed.
4. Set the port rate.
set port speed
The rate of 100M/1000M Ethernet optical port cannot be changed.
5. Set the port bandwidth.
set port bandwidth
The port bandwidth restriction is set by the unit of kbps. The ingress bandwidth and egress bandwidth of the port can be set separately according to actual requirements. There are three methods to set the ingress bandwidth restriction:
To restrict the rate of connectionless data packets, for example, filtering the broadcast packets, the granularity shall be 1K when the configured value is relatively small.
To restrict the rate of connection-oriented data packets, for example, data packets of TCP connection, the granularity of rate restriction shall be 64K and the range shall be from 64K to 1536K.
If the flow control is used to restrict the rate of connectionless or connection-oriented data packets, the port must be set to the 10M half duplex mode and the granularity shall be 1K when the configured value is relatively small.
For the ingress rate restriction, you can use the command set port ingess_limit_mode to select the type of the filtering data packets for the rate restriction.
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 107
Note: Setting the type of filtering packet of ingress bandwidth restriction to the broadcast packets can be use to perform the broadcast suppression function.
When the ingress or egress bandwidth restriction is set, the rate restriction range is between 64k and 256M. For a 100M port, the maximum bandwidth is 100M. When the rate configured is relatively small, the accuracy of bandwidth restriction is rather high. As the restriction rate increases, the accuracy of bandwidth restriction decreases gradually. When the restriction rate configured is larger than the maximum bandwidth of the port, the port rate becomes the maximum rate of the port.
The port egress bandwidth restriction function is not supported on the ZXR10 2609/2818SLE/2826SLE/2852SLE.
Configuration example (use the port bandwidth restriction to realize the suppression of broadcast storm): Set the broadcast suppression function for port 1, and restrict the broadcast packet to 500K.
zte(cfg)# set port 1 bandwidth ingress on rate 500
zte(cfg)# set port 1 ingess_limit_mode broadcast
zte(cfg)# show port 1 qos
Port: 1
PortQoSParams:
IngressRateLimit : 500 EgressRateLimit: 0
IngressType : normal RateLimitMode :
broadcast
SAPriority : disable VlanPriority :
disable
UserPriority : enable DscpPriority :
disable
DefaultPriority : 0
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
108 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
PortPriorityRemapTable:
COS(802.1p user priority), RMP(Remapped priority)
COS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RMP 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
zte(cfg)#
6. Set the flow control of a port.
set port flowcontrol
7. Set the priority of a port.
set port default-priority
8. Set the address learning function of a port.
set port security
When the setting is “enable”, the MAC address learning function is disabled. When the setting is “disable”, the MAC address learning function is enabled.
9. Set the multicast filter of a port.
set port multicast-filter
10. Set the external power supply mode of a port.
set port poe
11. Set the port rate advertisement.
set port speedadvertise
12. Set the number of MAC addresses.
set port macaddress
By default, the number of MAC addresses is 0, that is, no restriction.
13. Create a port name.
create port name
14. Add the port description.
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 109
set port description
15. Port QOS function
Each port supports the configuration of data packet priority. The priority of the data packets entering the port is determined by the parameters of the data packets and settings of the port. You can enable or disable any type of priority determination mechanism on the port. The priority determination mechanism of the received data packets on the port can be different. (The sequence of various priority determination modes is described in QoS Configuration.
Enable/Disable port source MAC priority function
set port sa-priority
The configured source MAC address priority can be used to determine the priority of the data packets when and only when the source MAC address of the received data packets is a static MAC address, and the source MAC priority determination function is enabled. The queue priority of data packets is mapped with the SA priority in the following way:
(0,1) 0; (2,3) 1; (4,5) 2; (6,7) 3
Enable/Disable the port VLAN priority.
set port vlan -priority
The configured VLAN priority can be used to determine the priority of data packets when and only when the priority of VLAN of the received data packets is enabled, and the port VALN priority determination function is enabled. The queue priority of data packets is mapped with the SA priority in the following way:
(0,1) 0; (2,3) 1; (4,5) 2; (6,7) 3
Enable/Disable the port 802.1P user priority.
set port user -priority
The port 802.1P user priority can be used to determine the priority of data packets when and only when the
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
110 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
received data packets are TAG ones and the port 802.1P user priority determination function is enabled. The queue priority of data packets is determined by the 802.1P user priority and queue priority mapping table.
Enable/Disable the port layer 3 DSCP priority.
set port dscp -priority
The port layer 3 DSCP priority can be used to determine the priority of data packets when and only when the received data packets are IP ones and the layer 3 DSCP determination function is enabled. The queue priority of data packets is determined by the IP DSCP priority and queue priority mapping table.
Set the port 802.1P user priority remapping table.
set port remapping-tag
When the data packets received by the port are TAG data packets, the switch first uses this mapping table to re-map the priority in the data packets, and then use this priority as the new 802.1P user priority for future priority determination. The default value of this mapping table is:
0 0, 1 1, 2 2, 3 3, 4 4, 5 5, 6 6, 7 7
It is not recommended to change the default values.
Note: The ZXR10 2609/2818SLE/2826SLE/ 2852SLE does not support the sa-priority, vlan-priority, and remapping-tag functions.
Table 11 lists the default settings of port parameters.
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 111
T AB L E 11 D E F AU L T S E T T I N G S O F P O R T P AR AM E T E R S
Parameter Default Configuration
Port status enable
Auto-sensing function enable
Flow control disable
Bandwidth restriction disable
Port priority 0
Port Information You can use the command show to view the port information.
1. Display the configuration and duplex mode of the port.
show port
View the configuration and current duplex mode of the port 1.
zte(cfg)#show port 1
Port: 1 MediaType : 100BaseT
PortParams:
PortEnable : enabled PortAutoNeg : enabled
DefaultVlanId : 1 FlowControl : disabled
Multicastfilter: disabled Security : disabled
SpeedAdvertise : MaxSpeed
PortMacLimit : disabled
PortStatus:
PortClass : 802.3 Link : down
Duplex : half Speed : 10 Mbps
zte(cfg)#
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
112 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
2. Display the QoS configuration data of the port.
show port qos
View the QoS configuration data of port 1.
zte(cfg)#show port 1 qos
Port: 1
PortQoSParams:
IngressRateLimit: 0 EgressRateLimit: 0
IngressType : normal RateLimitMode : broadcast
SAPriority : disable VlanPriority : disable
UserPriority : enable DscpPriority : disable
DefaultPriority : 0
PortPriorityRemapTable:
COS(802.1p user priority), RMP(Remapped priority)
COS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RMP 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
zte(cfg)#
Note: If the IngressRateLimit or EgressRateLimit is set to 0, it indicates that the port is not configured with the bandwidth restriction function.
3. Display the statistics data of the port.
show port statistics
View the statistics data of port 24 (port name: uplink)
zte(cfg)#show port 1 statistics
Port: 1 PortName:
ReceivedFrames : 0 ReceivedBroadcastFrames: 0
ReceivedBytes : 0 ReceivedMulticastFrames: 0
CrcError : 0 InPause : 0
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 113
InMACRcvErr : 0 Jabber : 0
Fragments : 0 UndersizeFrames : 0
Frames64Bytes : 0
Frames65_127Bytes : 0
Frames128_255Bytes: 0 Frames256_511Bytes : 0
Frames512_1023Bytes: 0 Frames1024_UpBytes : 0
OversizeFrames : 0
SendUnicastFrames : 0 SendBytes : 0
SendNoneUnicastFrames:0 SendFrames : 0
SendBroadcastFrames: 0 SendMulticastFrames : 0
SendSingleCollision: 0 SendMultiCollision : 0
SendLateCollision: 0 SendExcessCollision : 0
SendCollision : 0 SendDefferTrans : 0
OutPause : 0
zte(cfg)#
4. Remove the statistics data of the port.
You can use the command clear por to remove the statistics data of the port. After the command is executed, all the statistics data of the port will be cleared.
Port Mirroring Introduction Port mirroring is used to mirror the data packets of the switch port (ingress mirroring port) to an ingress destination port (ingress monitoring port), or mirror the data packets of the switch port (egress mirroring port) to an egress destination port (egress monitoring port).
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
114 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Through mirroring, the data packets flowing in or out of a certain port can be monitored. Port mirroring provides an effective tool for the maintenance and monitoring of the switch.
The switch can be configured with only one ingress monitoring port and one egress monitoring port. The ingress monitoring port and the egress monitoring port can be configured on the same port. But multiple source ingress monitoring ports and source egress monitoring ports can be configured at the same time.
Note: In the default case, the switch does not have the mirroring port. Port 1 is the ingress and egress monitoring ports. The GOOD data packets received by the ingress mirroring port are mirrored onto the monitoring ports. But the data packets directly discarded on the ingress port (for example, because of CRC errors) are not mirrored.
Basic Configuration The configuration of the port mirroring function includes the following contents:
1. Set a monitoring port.
set mirror dest-port
2. Add a mirroring port.
set mirror add source-port
3. Delete a mirroring port
set mirror delete source-port
4. Display the port mirroring configuration.
show mirror
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 115
Configuration Example To mirror the data packets received by port 1 and port 16 onto the monitoring port 10, configure as follows:
zte(cfg)# set mirror dest-port 10 ingress
zte(cfg)# set mirror add source-port 1,16 ingress
Use the command show mirror to view the port mirroring configuration.
zte(cfg)#show mirror
Ingress mirror information:
source-port: 1,16
destination -port: 10
Egress mirror information:
source-port: none
destination -port: 1
zte(cfg)#
To mirror the data packets received by port 2 and port 3 onto the monitoring port 4, configure a follows:
zte(cfg)# set mirror dest-port 4 ingress
zte(cfg)# set mirror add source-port 2,3 egress
VLAN Configuration Introduction The Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) protocol is a basic protocol of layer-2 switching equipment, which enables the administrator to
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
116 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
divide a physical LAN to multiple VLANs. Each VLAN has a VLAN ID to identify it uniquely in the entire LAN. Multiple VLANs share the switching equipment and links of the physical LAN.
Logically, a VLAN is like an independent LAN. All frame flows in the same VALN are restricted in this VLAN. Cross-VLAN visit can only be implemented through forwarding on layer 3. Direct multi-VLAN visit is impossible. In this way, the network performance is improved, and the overall flow in the physical LAN is effectively lowered.
The VLAN has the following functions:
Reduce the broadcast storms of network.
Enhance the network security.
Provide centralized management and control.
The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S also supports the tagged-based VLAN. This is a mode defined in IEEE 802.1Q and also is a universal working mode. In this mode, the division of VLAN is based on the VLAN information about the port (PVID: port VLAN ID) or the information in the VLAN tag.
Basic Configuration The VLAN configuration on the switch includes the following contents:
1. Enable/Disable the VLAN.
set vlan
2. Add a specified port to the VLAN.
set vlan add port
3. Delete a specified port to the VLAN.
set vlan delete port
4. Add a specified trunk to the VLAN.
set vlan add trunk
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 117
5. Delete a specified trunk to the VLAN.
set vlan delete trunk
6. Set the port PVID.
set port pvid
7. Set the trunk PVID.
set trunk pvid
8. Set the VLAN priority.
set vlan priority
9. Set the VLAN FID.
set vlan fid
VLANs with the same FID can share the forwarded items. Most equipment suppliers do not provide the configuration of FID and use the VID as the default FID.
10. Create a VLAN name.
create vlan name
11. Remove a VLAN name.
clear vlan name
12. Display the VLAN information.
show vlan
Configuration Example
Note: It is recommended to delete the default VLAN before the configuration.
1. Configure a VLAN.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
118 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Configure VLAN 100. Add untagged ports 1 and 2 and tagged ports 11 and 12. The detailed configuration is as follows:
zte(cfg)#set vlan 100 add port 1,2 untag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 100 add port 7,8 tag
zte(cfg)#set port 1,2 pvid 100
zte(cfg)#set vlan 100 enable
zte(cfg)#show vlan 100
VlanId : 100 Fid : 100 Priority: off
VlanStatus: enabled
VlanName:
Tagged ports : 7-8
Untagged ports: 1-2
zte(cfg)#
2. Configure overlapping VLAN.
As shown in Figure 41, port 16 of the switch is connected to the server and ports 1 to 3 are connected to the clients. It is required that ports 1 to 3 are isolated from each other, but all three ports can access the server.
F I G U R E 41 E X AM P L E O F OV E R L AP P I N G VL AN
p1 p2
Switch
p3p16
Server
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 119
The detailed configuration is as follows:
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2 add port 1,16 untag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 3 add port 2,16 untag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 4 add port 3,16 untag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 100 add port 1-3,16 untag
zte(cfg)#set port 1 pvid 2
zte(cfg)#set port 2 pvid 3
zte(cfg)#set port 3 pvid 4
zte(cfg)#set port 16 pvid 100
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2-4,100 fid 5
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2-4,100 enable
3. Configure the VLAN transparent transmission.
As shown in Figure 42, switch A is connected to switch B through port 16. Port 1 of switch A and port 2 of switch B belong to VLAN2, and port 3 of switch A and port 4 of switch B belong to VLAN3. Members of the same VLAN can communicate with each other.
F I G U R E 42 E X AM P L E O F VLAN TR AN S P AR E N T TR AN S M I S S I O N
p1 p3
Switch A
p4
Switch B
p2p16p16
The detailed configuration on the switch A is as follows:
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2 add port 16 tag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2 add port 1 untag
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
120 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
zte(cfg)#set vlan 3 add port 16 tag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 3 add port 3 untag
zte(cfg)#set port 1 pvid 2
zte(cfg)#set port 3 pvid 3
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2-3 enable
The detailed configuration on the switch B is as follows:
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2 add port 16 tag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2 add port 2 untag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 3 add port 16 tag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 3 add port 4 untag
zte(cfg)#set port 2 pvid 2
zte(cfg)#set port 4 pvid 3
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2-3 enable
MAC Table Operations Introduction MAC table operations include the configuration of MAC filter function, static address binding function, and MAC table aging time.
MAC filter function is to enable the switch to discard the received data packets whose source or destination MAC address is the specified MAC address.
Static address binding function is to bind the specified MAC address with the switch port. After the binding, this MAC is kept away from the dynamic study.
MAC table aging time refers to the period from the latest update of dynamic MAC address in the FDB table to the deletion of this address.
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 121
Configuration of the MAC filter function and static address binding function can effectively prevent the illegal access to the network and fraudulent use of key MAC addresses, and play an important role in ensuring the network security.
Basic Configuration 1. Set the filter address of fdb.
set fdb filter
2. Add the static binding address to the address table.
set fdb add
3. Delete a record in the table.
set fdb delete
4. Set the aging time of MAC address.
set fdb agingtime
5. Display the aging time of fdb address.
show fdb agingtime
6. Display the fdb information.
show fdb dynamic port
7. Display the MAC-based fdb information.
show fdb mac
8. Display the port-based fdb information.
show fdb port
9. Display the VLAN-based fdb information.
show fdb vlan
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
122 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
LACP Configuration Introduction Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is a standard protocol defined in IEEE 802.3ad.
Link aggregation means that physical links with the same transmission media and transmission rate are “bound” together, making them look like one link logically. This concept is also known as Trunking. It allows parallel physical links between the switches or between the switch and the server to increase the bandwidth in multiples and simultaneously. As a result, it becomes an import technology in broadening link bandwidth and creating link transmission flexibility and redundancy.
Aggregated link is also called trunk. If a port of the trunk is blocked or faulty, the data packets will be distributed to other ports of this trunk for transmission. If this port recovers, the data packets will be re-distributed to all the normal ports of this trunk for transmission.
The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S supports a maximum of 16 aggregation groups. In each aggregation group, the number of links participating in the aggregation does not exceed eight. Links participating in the aggregation must have the same transmission
media type and the same transmission rate.
Note: The ZXR10 2852SLE supports a maximum of eight aggregation groups.
Basic Configurations LACP configuration on the switch includes the following contents:
1. Enable/Disable the LACP function.
set lacp
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 123
By default, the LACP function is disabled.
2. Add a specified port to the aggregation group.
set lacp aggregator add port
3. Delete a specified port to the aggregation group.
set lacp aggregator delete port
If the port is in the self-negotiation mode or in the duplex mode, the aggregation is allowed. If the port is in the half duplex mode, the aggregation is prohibited.
4. Set aggregation mode of the aggregation group.
set lacp aggregator mode
If the aggregation group is set to the dynamic mode, the switch can only be connected with the in-service LACP device. If the aggregation group is set to the static mode, and the peer end is the static trunk that does not run the LACP protocol, the static aggregation is performed. If both the static trunk and LACP exist on the peer end, the LACP aggregation is preferred.
5. Configure the timeout information of the port participating in the aggregation.
set lacp port timeout
The timeout information refers to the expiration time, after which the port in the aggregation state exits the aggregation if it does not receive the LACP protocol packets from the peer end. The short timeout time is 3 seconds and the long timeout time is 90 seconds.
6. Set the mode used by the port to participate in the aggregation.
set lacp port mode
When the aggregation group is set to the dynamic mode, the switch can only be connected with the in-service LACP device. If the aggregation group is set to the static mode, the switch and the peer end use the static mode for
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
124 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
aggregation. In this case, more than two switches in the static mode are aggregated. If the aggregation group is set to the hybrid mode, and the peer end is the static trunk that does not run the LACP protocol, the static aggregation is performed. If both the static trunk and LACP exist on the peer end, the LACP aggregation is preferred.
7. Set the priority of LACP.
set lacp priority
8. Display the LACP configuration information.
show lacp
9. Display the aggregation information about the LACP aggregation group.
show lacp aggregator
10. Display the information of the port where the LACP is involved in the aggregation.
show lacp port
After the configuration of the aggregation group, you can perform various settings on it, such as setting the PVID, adding it to the VLAN, setting the static binding MAC address, and so on.
Configuration Example As shown in Figure 43, switch A and switch B are connected through the aggregation port (binding the port 15 and port 16). Port 1 of swtich A and port 2 of swtich B belong to VLAN2. Port 3 of swtich A and port 4 of swtich B belong to VLAN2. Members of the same VLAN can communicate with each other.
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 125
F I G U R E 43 E X AM P L E O F L ACP C O N F I G U R AT I O N
p1 p3
Switch A
p4
Switch B
p2p16p16
p15p15
The detailed configuration of switch A is as follows:
zte(cfg)#set lacp enable
zte(cfg)#set lacp aggregator 3 add port 15-16
zte(cfg)#set lacp aggregator 3 mode dynamic
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2 add trunk 3 tag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2 add port 1 untag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2 add trunk 3 tag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 3 add port 3 untag
zte(cfg)#set port 1 pvid 2
zte(cfg)#set port 3 pvid 3
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2-3 enable
The detailed configuration of switch B is as follows:
zte(cfg)#set lacp enable
zte(cfg)#set lacp aggregator 3 add port 15-16
zte(cfg)#set lacp aggregator 3 mode dynamic
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2 add trunk 3 tag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2 add port 2 untag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 3 add trunk 3 tag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 3 add port 4 untag
zte(cfg)#set port 2 pvid 2
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
126 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
zte(cfg)#set port 4 pvid 3
zte(cfg)#set vlan 2-3 enable
IGMP Snooping Configuration Introduction Because the multicast address cannot appear in the source address of the packet, the switch cannot learn the multicast address. When the switch receives a multicast message, it broadcasts the message to all the ports in the same VLAN. If no measure is taken, unwanted multicast message may be spread to each node of the network, thus causing a great waste of network bandwidth resource.
With the IGMP Snooping function, the IGMP communication between the host and router is snooped, so that the multicast packets are sent to the ports in the multicast forwarding table, instead of all ports. This restricts the wide spread of multicast messages in the LAN switch, reduces the waste of network bandwidth, and improves the utilization rate of the switch.
Basic Configuration Configuration of IGMP Snooping on the switch includes the following contents:
1. Enable/Disable the IGMP Snooping function.
set igmp snooping
By default, the IGMP Snooping function is disabled.
When the IGMP Snooping is disabled, you can use the command set port multicast to handle the multicast flow. If the parameter forward is selected, the multicast
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 127
messages will be forwarded to the corresponding port. If the parameter discard is selected, the multicast messages will be discarded on the corresponding port
After the IGMP Snooping function is enabled, the multicast flow is first forwarded according to the snooped multicast forwarding table. If the multicast forwarding table is not found, use the above configuration to determine whether to forward or discard the multicast messages for the port.
Note: When the IGMP Snooping function is disabled, it is recommended to disable the multicast forwarding function for the non-router ports and enable the multicast forwarding function for the router ports.
2. Add the IGMP Snooping function for the specified VLAN.
set igmp snooping add vlan
3. Delete the IGMP Snooping function for the specified VLAN.
set igmp snooping delete vlan
The multicast forwarding table can be snooped only when the IGMP Snooping function is added for the specified VLAN. The switch can support the snooping of up to 256 VLANs simultaneously.
4. Enable/Disable the IGMP snooping function for the specified VLAN.
set igmp snooping query vlan
After the IGMP Snooping function is enabled, if the IGMP snooping router does not exist, the normal IGMP Snooping function cannot be completed. In this case, enable the IGMP snooping function of the switch.
If the snooped VLAN has the IGMP snooping router, it is recommended to disable the IGMP snooping function of the switch. The switch runs the IGMP snooping V2.0,
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
128 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
which supports the V2.0 IGMP snooping router election function. If the layer 3 IP address and MAC address are set, the source IP address and source MAC address of the IGMP snooping are determined by the layer 3 configuration. Otherwise, use 0.0.0.0 and the MAC address of the switch as the source of the IGMP snooping.
5. Add a static multicast group.
set igmp snooping vlan add group
6. Delete a static multicast group.
set igmp snooping vlan delete group
After the IGMP Snooping function is running, the static multicast group can be registered in the name of the local switch. The switch supports the registration of up to 64 static multicast groups.
Note: The register multicast groups can only use the user multicast group address, which ranges from 224.x.x.x to 239.x.x.x, instead of the reserved multicast addresses. It is prohibited to register the following multicast addresses: 224.0.0.x.
7. Set multicast member/route timeout.
set igmp snooping timeout
8. Set the snooping interval.
set igmp snooping query_interval
9. Set the snooping response interval.
set igmp snooping response_interval
10. Set the last member snooping interval.
set igmp snooping lastmember_query
11. Enable/Disable the IGMP fastleave function.
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 129
set igmp snooping fastleave
After the IGMP Snooping is running and the correct port that the host is added in can be snooped, if the IGMP fastleave function is disabled when this port receives the IGMP fastleave message, the switch will send a specified group snooping message to this port twice to confirm that this port is removed from the multicast forwarding table. If the IGMP fastleave function is enabled, the specified group snooping is not performed and the port is directly removed from the multicast forwarding table.
If the state of multi-VLAN multicast snooping is changed from enabled to disabled, some snooping results of the multi-VLAN multicast snooping can be deleted after the related timeout period.
12. Enable/Disable the multi-VLAN IGMP snooping function.
set igmp snooping crossvlan
After the IGMP Snooping function is running and the PVID (default vlan_id) is used to correctly configure the one-to-multiple port forwarding mode, the multi-VLAN IGMP snooping function of the local switch can be used to snoop the IGMP information between VLANs and to carry out the multi-VLAN multicast forwarding.
13. Display the configuration of IGMP snooping.
show igmp snooping
14. Display the multicast snooping results.
show igmp snooping vlan
Configuration Example As shown in Figure 44, ports 1, 3, and 5 are connected to the host. Port 10 is connected to the router. The one-to-multiple communication mode is implemented. That is, port 10 can communicate with ports 1, 3, and 5, but ports 1, 3, and 5 cannot communicate with each other. The IGMP Snooping function of the switch is enabled and the snooping results are displayed.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
130 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 44 N E T W O R K TO P O L O G Y F O R ON E-TO -M AN Y C O M M U N I C AT I O N
IGMPRouter
p10
p1 p3 p5
Switch
The detailed configuration is as follows:
zte(cfg)#set vlan 200 add port 1,3,5,10 untag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 210 add port 1,10 untag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 230 add port 3,10 untag
zte(cfg)#set vlan 250 add port 5,10 untag
zte(cfg)#set port 10 pvid 200
zte(cfg)#set port 1 pvid 210
zte(cfg)#set port 3 pvid 230
zte(cfg)#set port 5 pvid 250
zte(cfg)#set vlan 200,210,230,250 fid 200
zte(cfg)#set vlan 200,210,230,250 enable
zte(cfg)#set igmp snooping enable
zte(cfg)#set igmp snooping add vlan 200,210,230,250
zte(cfg)#set igmp snooping crossvlan disable
Display the multicast snooping results:
zte(cfg)#show igmp snooping vlan
Num VlanId Group Last_Report
PortMember
1 210 224.1.1.1 192.168.1.1 1
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 131
2 230 224.1.1.1 192.168.1.2 3
3 250 224.1.1.1 192.168.1.3 5
Enable the multi-VLAN IGMP snooping function of the switch and display the snooping results:
zte(cfg)#set igmp snooping crossvlan enable
zte(cfg)#show igmp snooping vlan
Num VlanId Group Last_Report
PortMember
1 210 224.1.1.1 192.168.1.1 1
2 230 224.1.1.1 192.168.1.2 3
3 250 224.1.1.1 192.168.1.3 5
4 200 224.1.1.1 192.168.1.3 1,3,5,10
MSTP Configuration Introduction The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) applies to the network with loops. A path is obtained by using some algorithms and the redundant path is blocked. In this way, the network with loops is trimmed into a tree network without loops, and the growth and infinite circulation of packets in the network with loops are avoided. When this path works normally, other paths are blocked. When this path is faulty, a new path is obtained through re-calculation.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is on the basis of common STP, added with the mechanism that the port state can be rapidly changed from Blocking to Forwarding, which increases the topology convergence speed.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) is on the basis of RSTP and STP, added with the forwarding processing of frames with VLAN ID. The whole network topology structure can be planned into a
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
132 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST), which is divided into Common Spanning Tree (CST) and Internal Spanning Tree (IST), as shown in Figure 45.
F I G U R E 45 MSTP TO P O L O G I C AL S T R U C T U R E
IST
CST
In the whole MSTP topology structure, an IST can serve as a single bridge (switch). In this way, the CTS can serve as an RSTP for the interaction of configuration information (BPDU). Multiple instances can be created in an IST area and these instances are valid only in this area. An instance is equivalent to an RSTP, except that the instance needs to perform BPDU interaction with bridges outside this area.
When creating an instance, you must include one or more VLAN IDs into this instance. The ports that are on the bridge in this IST area and belong to these VLANs finally form an STP structure through the BPDU interaction. (Each instance corresponds to a STP structure.)
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 133
In this way, the bridge in this area forwards the data frames with thee VLAN IDs according to the STP structure of the corresponding instance. For data frames that shall be forwarded out of this area, no matter what VLAN ID they carry, these data frames will be forwarded according to the RSTP structure of CST.
Compared with the RSTP, the MSTP has the following advantages: In a certain IST area, the data frames carrying a VLAN ID can be forwarded according to the spanning tree structure set by the user and no loop will be resulted.
Note: The ZXR10 2609/2818SLE/2826SLE/2852SLE supports the STP and RSTP, instead of the MSTP.
Basic Configuration In the default configuration, the MSTP only has the instance with ins_id as 0. This instance always exists and you cannot manually delete it. This instance is mapped with VLANs 1 to 4094.
1. Enable/Disable the STP.
set stp
2. Set the STP forced version.
set stp forceversion
3. Set the mapping relation between the VLAN and instance.
set stp instance vlan
You can use this command to create an instance and set the mapping between the VLAN and this instance. These VLANs will be removed automatically from the VLAN mapping table of instance 0 and added to the VLAN mapping of the new instance.
4. Set the bridge priority.
set stp instance bridgeprio
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
134 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
5. Set the port priority of the instance.
set stp instance port priority
6. Set the trunk priority of the instance.
set stp instance trunk priority
7. Set port cost of the instance.
set stp instance port cost
8. Set trunk cost of the instance.
set stp instance trunk cost
9. Set the port Link type of the instance
set stp port linktype
10. Set the trunk Link type of the instance
set stp trunk linktype
11. Set the port packet type of the instance
set stp instance port packettype
12. Set the trunk packet type of the instance
set stp instance trunk packettype
13. Set the MSTP time parameters.
Set the STP hello time.
set stp hellotime
Set the STP forwarding delay.
set stp forwarddelay
Set the STP aging time.
set stp agemax
14. Set the maximum number of hop between any two terminals of MST.
set stp hopmax
15. Set the MST area name.
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 135
set stp name
16. Set the MST version.
set stp revision
The versions of MSTs in the same area must be the same.
17. Enable/Disable the STP relay.
set stp relay
18. Set the edge port.
set stp egde-port port
19. Display related STP information.
Display the STP information.
show stp
Display the STP instance information.
show stp instance
Display the STP port information.
show stp port
Display the STP trunk information.
show stp trunk
Display the STP relay information.
show stp relay
Configuration Example The following is an example of MSTP configuration.
1. Create instance 1, set up mapping relations with VLANs 10 to 20, and set the name as zte. The MST version is 10.
zte(cfg)#set stp instance 1 add vlan 10-20
zte(cfg)#set stp name zte
zte(cfg)#set stp revision 10
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
136 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
zte(cfg)#show stp
The STP ForceVersion is MSTP !
Revision: 10 Name: zte
Cisco key: 0x13ac06a62e47fd51f95d2ba243cd0346
Cisco digest: 0x00000000000000000000000000000000
Huawei key: 0x13ac06a62e47fd51f95d2ba243cd0346
Huawei digest: 0x00000000000000000000000000000000
Instance VlanMap
-------- -------------------
0 1-9,21-4094
1 10-20
zte(cfg)#
2. Set the bridge priority and port priority of the instance.
zte(cfg)#set vlan 10 add port 2 untag
zte(cfg)#set stp instance 1 bridgeprio 7
zte(cfg)#set stp instance 1 port 2 priority 112
zte(cfg)#show stp instance 0
MST00
Spanning tree enable protocol mstp
Root:
Priority :32768
Address :00.d0.d0.f0.12.35
HelloTime(s) :2 MaxAge(s) : 20
ForwardDelay(s):15 MaxHops :20
Reg RootID:
Priority :32768 Address :00.d0.d0.f0.12.39
BridgeID:
Priority :32768 Address :00.d0.d0.f0.12.39
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 137
HelloTime(s) :2 MaxAge(s) : 20
ForwardDelay(s):15 MaxHops :20
Interface PortId Cost Status Role Bound Linktype
Pkt PortEdged
------- ------ ------ ------- ------- ----- -------- ---
-- ---------
2 128.2 200000 Forward Root MSTP P2P
IEEE Disabled
zte(cfg)#show stp instance 1
MST01
Spanning tree enable protocol mstp
RootID:
Priority : 28672 Address :00.d0.d0.f0.12.39
HelloTime(s) :2 MaxAge(s) : 20
ForwardDelay(s):15 MaxHops :20
BridgeID:
Priority :28672 Address :00.d0.d0.f0.12.39
HelloTime(s) :2 MaxAge(s) : 20
ForwardDelay(s):15 MaxHops :20
Interface PortId Cost Status Role Bound Linktype Pkt
PortEdged
------- ------ ------ ------- ------- ----- -------- ---
-- ---------
2 112.2 200000 Forward Designated MSTP P2P
IEEE Disabled
zte(cfg)#show stp port 2
Only the following port is physical up!
MstInstance PortId Cost Status Role Linktype Pkt
PortEdged
-------- ------ ------- ------- --------- -------- -----
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
138 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
-- ---------
MST00 128.2 200000 Forward Root P2P IEEE
Disabled
MST01 112.2 200000 Forward Designated P2P IEEE
Disabled
QoS Configuration Introduction The switch provides the QoS function and the priority control function. The priority of the data packets can be determined by the source MAC address priority of the data packets, VLAN priority, 802.1P user priority, layer 3 DSCP priority, or the default port priority. The priority of a data packet is determined in the following sequence:
1. Priority of the data packets sent by CPU (determined by CPU).
2. Priority of the MGMT data packets (management data packets such as the BPDU packets). The priority of the management packets is determined by the initialization.
3. Priority of the static source MAC address.
4. VLAN priority.
5. 802.1P user priority.
6. Layer 3 DSCP priority.
7. Default port priority.
After the data packet priority is determined by the previous priority determination policy, the later policies are ignored. To use the default port priority to decide the priority of the data packets received by the port, all the following conditions shall be satisfied.
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 139
The data packets are not data packets sent by CPU or management data packets.
The source MAC address of the data packets cannot be the static address or the port source priority function is disabled.
Priority of the VLAN that the data packets belong to is disabled, or Priority of the VLAN of the port belongs to is disabled.
The 802.1P user priority of the port is disabled, or the data packets are not TAG data packets.
Port DSCP priority is disabled.
After the priority control policy of the switch is configured, if the switch receives the data frames, the data frames with higher priority can be transmitted first to ensure the key applications.
Note: By default, the port DSCP priority is enabled and other priority determination policies are disabled. You can enable or disable other priority determination policy according to the actual requirements.
If both the port 802.1P user priority and layer 3 DSCP priority policies are enabled, and the data packets received by the ports contain the IP data packet with 802.1P user priority, the switch uses the port 802.1P user priority to decide the priority of the data packets.
The ZXR10 2609/2818SLE/2826SLE/2852SLE does not support the static source MAC address priority and VLAN priority.
Basic Configuration QoS configuration of the switch includes the following contents:
1. Set the queue scheduling mode.
set qos queue-schedule
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
140 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
If the queue scheduling mode is set to wfq, the weights of four egress queues are as Follows:
Priority Queue Weight
0 1
1 2
2 4
3 8
2. Set the mapping of the 802.1P user priority into the queue priority.
set qos priority-map user-priority
Be default, the mapping from the 802.1P user priority to the queue priority is as follows:
(0,3) 1; (1, 2) 0: (4,5) 2: (6,7) 3
This mapping is used to determine the queue for the data packets when the 802.1P user priority or the default priority is used to decide the priority of the data packets.
3. Set the mapping of the IP DSCP priority into the queue priority.
set qos priority-map ip-priority
Be default, the mapping from the IP DSCP priority to the queue priority is as follows:
(0–15) 0; (16-31) 1; (32–47) 2; (48~63) 3
This mapping table is used to determine the queue for the data packets when the layer 3 DSCP priority is used to decide the priority of the data packets.
4. Display the queue scheduling configuration.
show qos queue-schedule
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 141
5. Display the QoS mapping of the 802.1P user priority into the queue priority and that of the IP DSCP priority into the queue priority.
show qos priority-map
Configuration Example Set the QoS mode to sp. The detailed configuration is as follows:
Zte(cfg)#set qos queue-mode sp
zte(cfg)#sho qos queue-schedule
Queue-schedule mode is SP(Strict Priority).
zte(cfg)#
Configure the mapping of 802.1P user priority into the queue priority as follows: (0–6) 0, 7 2. If the port UserPriority is enabled, the data packets received on the port are TAG data packets, and the TAG priority is 0-6, the data packets will go to the queue 0 on the egress. If the TAG priority is 7, the data packets will go to the queue 2 on the egress. The detailed configuration is as follows:
zte(cfg)# set qos priority-map user-priority 0 traffic-
class 0
zte(cfg)# set qos priority-map user-priority 1 traffic-
class 0
zte(cfg)# set qos priority-map user-priority 2 traffic-
class 0
zte(cfg)# set qos priority-map user-priority 3 traffic-
class 0
zte(cfg)# set qos priority-map user-priority 4 traffic-
class 0
zte(cfg)# set qos priority-map user-priority 5 traffic-
class 0
zte(cfg)# set qos priority-map user-priority 6 traffic-
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
142 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
class 0
zte(cfg)# set qos priority-map user-priority 7 traffic-
class 2
zte(cfg)#sho qos priority-map user-priority
Map of user priority to traffic class:
COS(802.1p user priority), TC(Traffic-Class)
COS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
Configure the mapping of IP DSCP priority into the queue priority as follows: (0–31) 1, (32,33) 3. Use default values for other mappings. If the port IpPriority is enabled, the data packets received on the port are IP data packets, and the DSCP priority is 0-31, the data packets will go to the queue 1 on the egress. If the DSCP priority is 32 or 33, the data packets will go to the queue 2 on the egress. The detailed configuration is as follows:
Zte(cfg)# set qos priority-map ip-priority 0-31 traffic-
class 1
Zte(cfg)# set qos priority-map ip-priority 32,33
traffic-class 2
zte(cfg)#sho qos priority-map ip-priority
Map of ip dscp priority to traffic class:
DSCP(ip dscp priority), TC(Traffic-Class)
DSCP 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
TC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1
DSCP 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
29 30 31
TC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 143
DSCP 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
45 46 47
TC 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2
DSCP 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
61 62 63
TC 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3
PVLAN Configuration Introduction Private VLAN (PVLAN) is a port-based VLAN. PVLAN consists of several shared ports and several isolated ports. Isolated ports cannot visit each other. But an isolated and a shared port can visit each other. At present, the switch supports one PVLAN.
The PVLAN can be applied if the users are only allowed to visit the server and prohibited to visit other subscribers. Thus, the PVLAN configuration can only be valid in a complete PVLAN that contains both shared and isolated ports. If only the shared or isolated ports are configured, the PVLAN configuration is invalid.
On the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S, setting of shared ports is restricted by the following condition: All shared ports must be in the same group.
The ZXR10 2609 only has one group. Thus, all ports are in the same group.
The ZXR10 2818S has two groups. Ports 1 to 8, and port 18 belong to the first group, and ports 9 to 16 and port 17 belong to the second group.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
144 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The ZXR10 2826S has three groups. Ports 1 to 8 belong to the first group. Port 9 to 16, and port 25 belong to the second group. Ports 17 to 24, and 26 belong to the third group.
The ZXR10 2852S has three groups. Ports 1 to 8 belong to the first group. Port 9 to 16 belong to the second group. Ports 17 to 24 belong to the third group. Ports 25 to 32 belong to the fourth group. Ports 33 to 40 belong to the fifth group. Port 44 to 48 belong to the sixth group. Ports 49 to 52 belong to the seventh group.
Basic Configuration PVLAN configuration on the switch includes the following contents:
1. Add/delete an isolated/shared port to the PVLAN.
set pvlan session
2. Show the PVLAN configuration.
show pvlan
Configuration Example As shown in Figure 46, add shared port 16 and isolated ports 1, 2, and 3 to the PVLAN.
F I G U R E 46 PVL AN C O N F I G U R AT I O N E X AM P L E
p1 p2
Switch
p3p16
Server
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 145
The detailed configuration is as follows:
zte(cfg)#set pvlan session 1 add promiscuous-port 16
zte(cfg)#set pvlan session 1 add isolated-port 1-3
zte(cfg)#show pvlan
pvlan session : 1
promiscuous-port : 16
isolated-port : 1-3
802.1x Transparent Transmission Configuration IEEE 802.1x is a port-based network access control protocol. Port-based network access control is a way to authenticate and authorize the users connected to the LAN equipment. This type of authentication provides a point-to-pint subscriber identification method in the LAN.
The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S provides the 802.1x transparent transmission function that allows the transparent transmission of 802.1x protocol packets from the client to the authentication server for authentication.
The Configuration of 802.1x transparent transmission includes the following contents:
1. Enable/Disable the 802.1x transparent transmission function.
set dot1xrelay
2. Display the configuration of 802.1x transparent transmission.
show dot1xrelay
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
146 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Layer 3 Configuration Introduction The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S provides a few layer 3 functions for the remote configuration and management. To realize the remote access, an IP port must be configured on the switch. If the IP port of the remote configuration host and that of the switch are not in the same network segment, it is also necessary to configure the static route.
Static route is a simple unicast route protocol. The next-hop address to a destination network segment is specified by the user, where next hop is also called bridge. Static route involves destination address, destination address mask, next-hop address, and egress interface. The destination address and destination address mask describe the destination network information. The next-hop address and egress interface describe the way that the switch forwards the destination packet.
The ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S allows the addition and deletion of entries in the static ARP table.The ARP table records the mapping between the IP address of each node in the same network and the MAC address. When sending the IP packets, the switch first checks whether the destination IP address is in the same network segment. If yes, the switch checks whether there is a peer end IP address and MAC address mapping entry in the ARP table.
1. If yes, the switch directly sends the IP packets to this MAC address.
2. If the MAC address corresponding to the peer end IP address cannot be found in the ARP table, an ARP Request broadcast packet is sent to the network to query the peer end MAC address.
Generally, entries of the ARP table on the switch are dynamic. The static ARP table entry is configured only when the connected host cannot respond to the ARP Request.
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 147
To configure the Layer 3 function, you need to use the command config router to enter the Layer 3 configuration mode first.
IP Port Configuration IP port configuration of the switch includes the following contents:
1. Set the IP address and mask of the layer 3 port.
set ipport ipaddress
2. Bind the VLAN for the layer 3 port.
set ipport vlan
3. Set the MAC address of the layer 3 port
set ipport mac
If the MAC address is not set, the MAC address of the switch is used instead.
4. Enable/Disable the layer 3 port.
set ipport
When modifying the configuration of an IP port, you need to set the port to disabled state first, and then modify the configuration. The new settings will overwrite the original ones.
You can use the command clear ipport to clear one or all the parameters of the port. Before clearing parameters, you need to set the port to disabled state first.
For example: Configure an IP port on the switch. Set the IP address of the port to 192.1.1.1 and the mask to 24 digits. Bind the port to VLAN 100. The port uses the default address of the switch. The detailed configuration is as follows:
zte(cfg)#config router
zte(cfg-router)#set ipport 1 ipaddress 192.1.1.1/24
zte(cfg-router)#set ipport 1 vlan 100
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
148 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
zte(cfg-router)#set ipport 1 enable
zte(cfg-VLAN2)#exit
zte(cfg)#
After the configuration is completed, you can use the command show ippor to view the IP port configuration.
Static Route Configuration After an IP port is configured, if the remote user to be connected is not in the network segment of the interface, you need to use the command iproute to set a static route to the remote network.
F I G U R E 47 C O N F I G U R AT I O N E X AM P L E O F S T AT I C R O U T E
192.1.1.1/24
192.1.1.2/24
192.1.2.0/24
Switch
Router
As shown in Figure 47, the remote host is located in the network segment 192.1.2.0/24, which is not the same as the switch.
To enable the communication between the switch and the host on the network segment 192.1.2.0/24, configure the following static route.
zte(cfg)#config router
zte(cfg-router)#iproute 192.1.2.0/24 192.1.1.2
You can use the command show iproute to view the direct routes and static routes on the switch.
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 149
The command result displays the destination network segment, next-hop address, route metric and egress interface of the static route. The following shows the result.
zte(cfg-router)#show iproute
Type IpAddress Mask Gateway
Metric IPport
------ --------------- ------------- --------------- -
----- ------
direct 192.1.1.0 255.255.252.0 192.1.1.1 0 0
static 192.1.2.0 255.255.255.0 192.1.1.2 0 0
Total 2
You can use the command clear iproute to delete one or more static routes.
ARP Table Entry Configuration The Configuration of ARP table entry on the switch includes the following contents:
1. Add a static ARP table entry.
arp add
2. Delete a static ARP table entry.
arp delete
3. Delete all static ARP table entries.
clear arp
4. Set the ARP table entry aging time of the IP port.
arp ipport timeout
If the existence period (during this period, packet of this IP address is not received) of an ARP table entry on the switch is larger than the aging time on the IP port, the switch will delete this ARP table entry.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
150 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
5. View ARP table entries.
show arp
Access Service Configuration Introduction With the rapid expansion of Ethernet construction scale, to meet the fast increase of subscribers and requirement of diversified broadband services, Network Access Service (NAS) is embedded on the switch to improve the authentication and management of access subscribers and better support the billing, security, operation, and management of the broadband network.
NAS uses the 802.1x protocol and RADIUS protocol to realize the authentication and management of access subscribers. It is highly efficient, safe, and easy to operate.
IEEE 802.1x is called port-based network access control protocol. Its protocol system includes three key parts: client system, authentication system, and authentication server.
1. The client system is generally a user terminal system installed with the client software. A subscriber originates the IEEE802.1x protocol authentication process through this client software. To support the port-based network access control, the client system must support the Extensible Authentication Protocol Over LAN (EAPOL).
2. The authentication system is generally network equipment that supports the IEEE802.1x protocol, for example, the switch. Corresponding to the ports of different subscribers (the ports could be physical ports or MAC address, VLAN, or IP address of the user equipment), the authentication
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 151
system has two logical ports: controlled port and uncontrolled port.
The uncontrolled port is always in the state that the bidirectional connections are available. It is used to transfer the EAPOL frames and can ensure that the client can always send or receive the authentication.
The control port is enabled only when the authentication is passed. It is used to transfer the network resource and services. The controlled port can be configured as bidirectional controlled or input controlled to meet the requirement of different applications. If the subscriber authentication is not passed, this subscriber cannot visit the services provided by the authentication system.
The controlled port and uncontrolled port in the IEEE 802.1x protocol are logical ports. There are no such physical ports on the equipment. The IEEE 802.1x protocol sets up a local authentication for each subscriber that other subscribers cannot use. Thus, there will not be such a problem that the port is used by other subscribers after the port is enabled.
3. The authentication server is generally a RADIUS server. This server can store a lot of subscriber information, such as VLAN that the subscriber belongs to, CAR parameters, priority, subscriber access control list, and so on. After the authentication of a subscriber is passed, the authentication server will pass the information of this subscriber to the authentication system, which will create a dynamic access control list. The subsequent flow of the subscriber will be monitored by the above parameters. The authentication system communicates with the RADIUS server through the RADIUS protocol.
RADIUS is a protocol standard used for the authentication, authorization, and exchange of configuration data between the Radius server and Radius client.
RADIUS adopts the Client/Server mode. The Client runs on the NAS. It is responsible for sending the subscriber information to the
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
152 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
specified Radius server and carrying out operations according to the result returned by the server.
The Radius Authentication Server is responsible for receiving the subscriber connection request, verifying the subscriber identity, and returning the configuration information required by the customer. A Radius Authentication Server can serve as a RADIUS customer proxy to connect to another Radius Authentication Server.
The Radius Accounting Server is responsible for receiving the subscriber billing start request and subscriber billing stop request, and completing the billing function.
The NAS communicates with the Radius Server through RADIUS packets. Attributes in the RADIUS packets are used to transfer the detailed authentication, authorization, and billing information. The attributes used by this switch are primarily standard attributes defined in the rfc2865, rfc2866, and rfc2869.
The EAP protocol is used between the switch and the subscriber. Three types of identity authentication methods are provided between the RADIUS servers: PAP, CHAP, and EAP-MD5. Any of the methods can be used according to different service operation requirements.
Password Authentication Protocol (PAP)
PAP is a simple plain text authentication mode. NAS requires the subscriber to provide the username and password and the subscriber returns the subscriber information in the form of plain text. The server checks whether this subscriber is available and whether the password is correct according to the subscriber configuration and returns different responses. This authentication mode features poor security and the username and password transferred may be easily stolen.
Figure 48 shows the process of using the PAP mode for identity authentication.
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 153
F I G U R E 48 U S I N G PAP M O D E F O R I D E N T I T Y AU T H E N T I C AT I O N
EAPOL RADIUS
EAPOL-Start
EAP-Request/Identity
EAP-Response/Identity
EAP-Request/PAP
EAP-Response/PAP Access-Request/PAP
Access-AcceptEAP-Success
User terminal systemSwitch
Connection setup
Successful access
RADIUS server
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP)
CHAP is an encrypted authentication mode and avoids the transmission of the user’s real password upon the setup of connection. NAS sends a randomly generated Challenge string to the user. The user encrypts the Challenge string by using the own password and MD5 algorithm and returns the username and encrypted Challenge string (encrypted password).
The server uses the user password it stores and the MD5 algorithm to encrypt the Challenge string. Then it compares this Challenge string with the encrypted password of the server and returns a response accordingly.
Figure 49 shows the process of using the CHAP mode for identity authentication.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
154 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 49 U S I N G CHAP M O D E F O R I D E N T I T Y AU T H E N T I C AT I O N
EAPOL RADIUS
EAPOL-Start
EAP-Request/Identity
EAP-Response/Identity
EAP-Request/Challenge
EAP-Response/MD5-Challenge Access-Request/CHAP
Access-AcceptEAP-Success
User terminal systemSwitch
Connection setup
Successful access
RADIUS server
Extensible Authentication Protocol - Message Digest 5 (EAP-MD5)
EAP-MD5 is a CHAP identity authentication mechanism used in the EAP framework structure. Figure 50 shows the process of using the EAP-MD5 mode for identity authentication.
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 155
F I G U R E 50 U S I N G EAP-MD5 M O D E F O R I D E N T I T Y AU T H E N T I C AT I O N
EAPOL RADIUS
EAPOL-Start
EAP-Request/Identity
EAP-Response/Identity
EAP-Request/Challenge
EAP-Response/MD5-Challenge Access-Request
Access-AcceptEAP-Success
User terminal system RADIUS serverSwitch
Access-RequestConnection setup
Successful access
Access-Challenge
Basic Configuration The 802.1x configuration on the switch includes the following contents:
1. Enable/Disable the port 802.1x function.
aaa-control port dot1x
2. Configure the authentication control mode of the port.
aaa-control port port-mode
The available modes include:
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
156 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
auto: Subscriber access from the port configured as “auto” must go through the authentication. The subscriber access is successful only when the authentication is successful.
force-authorized: The subscriber can be connected to the network through this port without authentication.
force-unauthorized: The subscriber cannot be connected to the network through this port.
The default authentication control mode is “auto”.
3. Allow/Prohibit multi-subscriber access of the port.
aaa-control port multiple-host
4. Set the maximum number of subscribers connected through the port.
aaa-control port max-hosts
A port can allow the access of multiple subscribers and each subscriber has own independent authentication and billing processes. The aaa-control port max-hosts command is valid only when the port allows the access of multiple subscribers.
5. Enable/Disable re-authentication mechanism.
dot1x re-authenticate
6. Set the re-authentication interval.
dot1x re-authenticate period
To judge whether the accessed subscriber maintains the connection all the time, the NAS can periodically request the re-authentication of this subscriber. Re-authentication needs to initiate a complete authentication process for each on-line subscriber. If the number of subscribers is large, there will be a lot of authentication packets, which brings a heavy burden to the switch.
7. Enable/Disable the abnormal off-line detection mechanism of the port.
aaa-control port keepalive
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 157
8. Set the abnormal off-line detection period of the port.
aaa-control port keepalive period
Besides the re-authentication mechanism, the NAS module also introduces the abnormal off-line detection mechanism to judge whether the subscriber still keeps the connection. The abnormal off-line detection mechanism only requires a few packet interactions to determine whether the subscriber is still on line.
The abnormal off-line detection mechanism is implemented in this way: The device takes the initiative to send a detection request periodically to the client. The EAPOL/EAP RepId packet defined in the 802.1x protocol is used as the request packet. If the EAPOL/EAP RepId response is received from the client, it means that the subscriber is still on line. Otherwise, the subscriber is off line.
9. Set the authentication mode of the port.
aaa-control port protocol
During the subscriber access authentication, there are three subscriber identity authentication methods between the authentication server and the authentication system: PAP, CHAP, and EAP-MD5. The default one is EAP-MD5.
10. Set the protocol parameters.
Set the interval between the first authentication failure of the authentication system and the next authentication request.
dot1x quiet-period
Set the time that the authentication system needs to wait before it can resend the EAPOL data packet because it does not receive the response from the client.
dot1x tx-period
Set the timeout time for the authentication system to receive the data packets from the authentication client system.
dot1x supplicant-timeout
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
158 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Set the timeout time for the authentication system to receive the data packets from the authentication server.
dot1x server-timeout
Set the maximum times of request resending when the timer expires before the authentication system receives the Challenge response from the client.
dot1x max-request
The 802.1x realizes the access control by exchanging EAPOL data packets between the client system and authentication system and the RADIUS data packets between the authentication system and authentication server. During the exchange of data packets, the following parameters are used for control purpose:
quietPeriod refers to the period before which the authentication system will not receive the authentication request from the client system after the first authentication failure. This function can prevent the subscriber’s continuous authentication attempts.
txPeriod refers to the time after which the authentication system will resend the EAPOL data packets to the client system when it does not receive the response from the client system.
supplicant Timeout and serverTimeout respectively refer to the time during which the authentication system shall receive the data packet from the client system and the authentication server.
max-request refers to the maximum times of request resending when the timer expires before the authentication system receives the Challenge response from the client system.
11. Display the 802.1x configuration of the port.
show aaa-control port
12. Display the 802.1x protocol parameters.
show dot1x
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 159
RADIUS configuration on the switch includes the following contents;
Add/Delete an ISP domain.
radius isp
In the RADIUS configuration, the concept of isp-domain is introduced. Different domains may be operated by different ISPs. The access equipment identifies the domain that the subscriber belongs to according to the domain name in the subscriber name (username@DomainName) input by the subscriber and sends the authentication and billing requests of the subscriber to the authentication server and billing server of the corresponding domain. Each domain has its own RADIUS server.
After a domain is deleted, all the configurations related to this domain are deleted.
13. Add the authentication server to the domain.
radius isp add authentication
14. Delete the authentication server from the domain.
radius isp delete authentication
A domain can be configured with up to three authentication servers. The priority of the server is determined by the configuration order. The first server configured enjoys the highest priority, and the last server has the lowest priority. When a server is deleted, the priorities of the related servers rise in sequence.
15. Add an accounting server to the domain.
radius isp add accounting
16. Delete an accounting server from the domain.
radius isp delete accounting
A domain can be configured with up to three accounting servers. The priority of the server is determined by the configuration order. The first server configured enjoys the highest priority, and the last server has the lowest priority.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
160 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
When a server is deleted, the priorities of the related servers rise in sequence.
17. Set the IP address of the client in the domain.
radius isp client
The IP address of the client in the domain must be the IP address of an interface on the switch.
18. Set the shared password.
radius isp sharedsecret
The shared password is used for the data encryption between the RADIUS client and RADIUS server. The setting of shared password must be consistent on the client and the server.
19. Specify a default domain.
radius isp defaultisp
Only one domain can be specified as the default domain in the system. The system will send the subscriber authentication requests without the domain name specified on the RADIUS authentication server in the default domain.
20. Set the full account of the domain.
radius isp fullaccount
When it is specified to use the full account, the RADIUS client uses “username@DomainName” as the subscriber name to request the authentication of the RADIUS server. If it is not specified to use the full account, the subscriber name will not contain the domain name.
21. Configure the domain description.
radius isp description
22. Configure the RADIUS parameters.
Set the server response timeout time.
radius timeout
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 161
Set the number of retransmissions upon server response timeout.
radius retransmit
Set the NAS server name.
radius nasname
23. Enable/Disable the billing function of the port.
aaa-control port accounting
24. Display the RADIUS configuration.
show radius
Configuration Example 1. Enable the 802.1x function of port 1. Set the quiet-period
to 5 seconds, tx-period to 5 seconds, supp-timeout to 3 seconds, and server-timeout to 3 seconds. Enable the keepalive function and set the keepalive interval to 180 seconds.
zte(cfg-nas)#aaa-control port 1 dot1x enable
zte(cfg-nas)#dot1x quiet-period 5
zte(cfg-nas)#dot1x tx-period 5
zte(cfg-nas)#dot1x supplicant-timeout 3
zte(cfg-nas)#dot1x server-timeout 3
zte(cfg-nas)#aaa-control port 1 keepalive enable
zte(cfg-nas)#aaa-control port 1 keepalive period 180
zte(cfg-nas)#show aaa-control 1
PortId : 1 PortControl : auto
Dot1x : enabled AuthenticationProtocol : eapMd5
KeepAlive : enabled KeepAlivePeriod : 180
Accounting : disabled MultipleHosts : disabled
MaxHosts : 0 HistoryHostsTotal : 0
OnlineHosts : 0
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
162 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
zte(cfg-nas)#show dot1x
TxPeriod :5 QuietPeriod : 5
SuppTimeout :3 ServerTimeout : 3
ReAuthPeriod:3600 ReAuthenticate : disabled
MaxReq : 2
zte(cfg-OSPF)#?
2. Enable the re-authentication function and set the re-authentication period to 60 seconds.
zte(cfg-nas)#dot1x re-authenticate enable
zte(cfg-nas)#dot1x re-authenticate period 60
zte(cfg-nas)#show dot1x
TxPeriod : 5 QuietPeriod :
5
SuppTimeout : 3 ServerTimeout :
3
ReAuthPeriod : 60 ReAuthenticate :
enabled
MaxReq : 2
zte(cfg-OSPF)#?
3. Set the authentication control state of port 1 to auto and authentication mode to CHAP. Enable the multi-subscriber access. The maximum number of subscriber accessed is 5.
zte(cfg-nas)#aaa-control port 1 port-mode auto
zte(cfg-nas)#aaa-control port 1 protocol chap
zte(cfg-nas)#aaa-control port 1 multiple-hosts enable
zte(cfg-nas)#aaa-control port 1 max-hosts 5
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 163
zte(cfg-nas)#show aaa-control 1
PortId : 1 PortControl : auto
Dot1x : enabled AuthenticationProtocol : chap:
KeepAlive: enabled KeepAlivePeriod : 180
Accounting: disabled MultipleHosts : enabled
MaxHosts: 5 HistoryHostsTotal : 0
OnlineHosts : 0
4. Configure the RADIUS domain 188 according to the following requirements:
Authentication server address and accounting server address: 10.40.92.212 and 10.40.92.215
Share Password: 123456
Client IP address: 10.40.92.100. Use the default domain.
zte(cfg-nas)#radius isp 188 enable
zte(cfg-nas)#radius isp 188 add authentication
10.40.92.212
zte(cfg-nas)#radius isp 188 add authentication
10.40.92.215
zte(cfg-nas)#radius isp 188 add accounting 10.40.92.215
zte(cfg-nas)#radius isp 188 add accounting 10.40.92.212
zte(cfg-nas)#radius isp 188 sharedsecret 123456
zte(cfg-nas)#radius isp 188 client 10.40.92.100
zte(cfg-nas)#radius isp 188 defaultisp enable
zte(cfg-nas)#show radius 188
Client : 10.40.92.100 IspName : 188
DefaultIsp : Yes Description :
FullAccounts : No SharedSecret : 123456
Authentication servers Auth-port
---------------------- ---------
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
164 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
10.40.92.212 1812
10.40.92.215 1812
Accounting servers Acct-port
---------------------- ---------
10.40.92.215 1813
10.40.92.212 1813
zte(cfg-OSPF)#?
QinQ Configuration Introduction QinQ is the IEEE 802.1Q tunneling protocol and is also called VLAN stacking. QinQ technology is the addition of one more VLAN tag (outer tag) to the original VLAN tag (inner tag). The outer tag can shield the inner tag.
QinQ does not need the protocol support. The simple Layer 2 Virtual Private Network (L2VPN) can be realized through QinQ. The QinQ is especially suitable for the small-size LAN that takes the layer 3 switch as its backbone.
Figure 51 shows the typical networking of the QinQ technology. The port connected to the user network is called Customer port. The port connected to the ISP network is called Uplink port. The edge access equipment of the ISP network is called Provider Edge (PE).
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 165
F I G U R E 51 TY P I C AL Q I N Q N E T W O R K I N G
User network 2CVLAN 1~100
SPVLAN 10customer port
SPVLAN 10uplink port
Switch APE PE
Switch B
User network 1CVLAN 1~100
SPVLAN 10customer port
SPVLAN 10uplink port
ISP network
SPVLAN: Service Provider VLAN
CVLAN: Customer VLAN
The user network is generally connected to the PE through the Trunk VLAN mode. The internal Uplink ports of the ISP network are symmetrically connected through the Trunk VLAN mode.
1. When a packet is sent form user network 1 to the customer port of switch A, because the PORTBASE VLAN-based customer port does not identify the tag when receiving the packet, the customer port processes the packet as an untagged packet no matter whether this data packet is attached with the VLAN tag or not. The packet is forwarded by the VLAN 10, which is determined by the PVID.
2. The uplink port of switch A inserts the outer tag (VLAN ID: 10) when forwarding the data packet received from the customer port. The tpid of this tag can be configured on the switch. Inside the ISP network, the packet is broadcast along the port of VLAN 10 until it reaches the switch B.
3. Switch B finds out that the port connected to user network 2 is a customer port. Thus, it removes the outer tag in compliance with the conventional 802.1Q protocol to
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
166 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
recover the original packet and sends the packet to user network 2.
4. In this way, data between user network 1 and user network 2 can be transmitted transparently. The VLAN IDs of the user network can be planned regardless of the conflict with the VLAN IDs in the ISP network.
Note: ZXR10 2609/2818SLE/2826SLE/2852SLE does not support this function.
Basic Configuration The PVLAN configuration on the switch includes the following contents:
1. Add/Delete a Customer port.
set qinq customer port
2. Add/Delete an Uplink port.
set qinq uplink port
3. Set the tpid of the outer tag.
set qinq tpid
4. Display the QinQ configuration.
show qinq
Note: When the QinQ is configured, the customer port and the uplink port of the SPVLAN can be set as an untagged port, or as a tagged port.
Chapter 7 - Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 167
Configuration Example As show in Figure 51, suppose that the customer port of swtich A is port 1 and the uplink port is port 24. The customer port of swtich B is port 1 and the uplink port is port 24.
The configuration of switch A is as follows:
zte(cfg)#set vlan 10 enable
zte(cfg)#set vlan 10 add port 1,24
zte(cfg)#set port 1,24 pvid 10
zte(cfg)#set qinq customer port 1 enable
zte(cfg)#set qinq uplink port 24 enable
The configuration of switch B is the same as that of switch A.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 168
This page is intentionally blank.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 169
C h a p t e r 8
Network Management
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Network management functions of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S, such as Remote-Access, SSH, SNMP, RMON and cluster management.
Remote-Access Introduction Remote-Access is a restrictive mechanism used for network management users to log in through Telnet, that is, it is used to restrict the access. This function is to enhance the security of the network management system.
After this function is enabled, you can specify a network management user to access the switch only from a specified IP address by configuring the related parameters. In this case, the user cannot access the switch from other IP addresses. When this function is disabled, the network management user can access the switch through Telnet from any IP address.
Basic Configuration The Remote-Access configuration on the switch includes the following contents:
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
170 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
1. Disable/enable the restrictive access.
set remote-access
By default, the restrictive access is disabled.
2. Configure the IP address that allows for access.
set remote-access ipaddress
3. Delete all IP addresses that allow for access.
clear remote-access all
4. Delete an IP address that allows for access.
clear remote-access ipaddress
5. Display the Remote-Access configuration information.
show remote-access
Configuration Example Example 1: Only allow the network management user to access the switch from 10.40.92.0/24 through Telnet.
zte(cfg)#set remote-access specific
zte(cfg)#set remote-access ipaddress 10.40.92.0 255.255.255.0
zte(cfg)#show remote-access
Whether check remote manage address: YES
Allowable remote manage address list:
10.40.92.0/255.255.255.0
zte(cfg)#
Example 2: Only allow the network management user to access the switch from 10.40.92.212 through Telnet.
zte(cfg)#set remote-access specific
zte(cfg)#set remote-access ipaddress 10.40.92.212
zte(cfg)#show remote-access
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 171
Whether check remote manage address: YES
Allowable remote manage address list:
10.40.92.212/255.255.255.255
zte(cfg)#
Example 3: Allow the network management user to access the switch from any IP address through Telnet.
zte(cfg)#set remote-access any
zte(cfg)#show remote-access
Whether check remote manage address: NO
Allowable remote manage address list:
none
zte(cfg)#
SSH Introduction The secure shell (SSH) is a protocol created by Network Working Group of the IETF, which is used to offer secure remote access and other secure network services over an insecure network.
The purpose of the SSH protocol is to solve the security problems in interconnected networks, and to offer a securer substitute for Telnet and Rlogin (Although the present development of the SSH protocol has far exceeded the remote access function scope), therefore, the SSH connection protocol shall support interactive session.
The SSH can be used to encrypt all transmitted data. Even if these data is intercepted, no useful information can be obtained.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
172 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
At present, the SSH protocol has two incompatible versions: SSH v1.x and SSH v2.x. This switch only supports SSH v2.0 and uses the password authentication mode. The SSH uses port 22.
Basic Configuration The SSH configuration on the switch includes the following contents:
1. Enable or disable SSH.
set ssh
By default, the SSH function is disabled. The SSH is generally used for configuring remote access to the switch. The user name and password for login (or remote RADIUS login mode) shall be configured on the switch, and the local host shall be able to ping the IP port address on the switch normally.
This switch only supports SSH login of a single user, allowing for three login attempts. After three login attempts, the connection with the user is automatically terminated. After user login, the set ssh disable command can be used to terminate the connection with the user and prohibit the user from logging in through SSH. However, if the user is in Diffie-Hellman key exchange state, the command is disabled.
2. Display the SSH configuration and user login status.
show ssh
Configuration Example As shown in Figure 52, one host attempts to access the switch through SSH. The switch is configured with a layer 3 port. The IP address of the port is 192.1.1.1/24, and the IP address of the host is 192.1.1.100/24.
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 173
F I G U R E 52 SSH C O N F I G U R AT I O N E X AM P L E
192.1.1.100/24
Switch
192.1.1.1/24
The specific configuration of the switch is as follows:
zte(cfg)#creat user zte
zte(cfg)#loginpass zte
zte(cfg)#set ssh enable
The client using SSH v2.0 can use the free software Putty developed by Simon Tatham to access the switch. The required settings are as follows.
1. Set the IP address and port number of the SSH Server, as shown in Figure 53.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
174 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 53 S E T T I N G IP AD D R E S S AN D P O R T N U M B E R O F T H E SSH S E R V E R
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 175
2. Set the SSH version number, as shown in Figure 54.
F I G U R E 54 S E T T I N G SSH VE R S I O N N U M B E R
3. For the first time to log in, the user confirmation is needed, as shown in Figure 55.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
176 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
F I G U R E 55 U S E R C O N F I R M AT I O N R E Q U I R E D I N T H E F I R S T LO G I N
4. The SSH login result is shown in Figure 56.
F I G U R E 56 SSH LO G I N R E S U L T
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 177
SNMP Introduction SNMP is the most popular network management protocol currently. It involves a series of protocol suite and specifications:
MIB
SMI
SNMP
They offer the means to collect network management information from network devices. SNMP also enables devices to report problems and errors to network management stations. Any network administrator can use SNMP to manage switches.
SNMP adopts the “Management process—Agent process” model to monitor and control all types of managed network devices. The SNMP network management needs three key elements:
1. Managed devices, which can communicate over the Internet. Each device contains an agent.
2. Network Management Station (NMS). The network management process shall be able to communicate over the Internet.
3. The protocol used for the exchange of management information between the switching agent process and the NMS, that is, SNMP.
An NMS collects data by polling the agents that reside in the managed devices. The agents in the managed devices can report errors to NMSs at any time before the NMSs poll them. These errors are called traps. When a trap occurs to a device, the NMS can be used to query the device (suppose it is reachable) and obtain more information.
All variables in the network are stored in the MIB. SNMP monitors network device status by querying the related object values in the
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
178 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
agent MIB.ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S implements the standard MIB defined in rfc1213, rfc1493, rfc2674 and rfc2819.
Basic Configuration The SNMP configuration includes the following contents:
1. Create communication name and set the access authority.
create community
The community string offers a user confirmation mechanism for remote network administrators to configure switches. The “public” indicates that the switch only allows for read only access, while “private” indicates that the read/write authority to the switch is permitted.
If the community string created with this command already exists, the newly created string overwrites the original one.
2. Create a view and specify whether the view contains a mib subtree.
create view
A view is an object subset of the MIB. The parameter <mib-oid> specifies the mib subtree. If the excluded or included mib subtree is not specified, it includes 1.3.6.1 by default.
If the view created with this command already exists, the newly created view overwrites the original one.
3. Set specific community name that the view contains.
set community view
The community and view must be created. One community can only correspond to one view, but one view can correspond to multiple communities.
4. Set the IP address, community name and version of the trap host.
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 179
set traphost
The trap host is the destination host to which the traps are sent.
5. Delete a community name.
clear community
6. Delete a view name.
clear view
7. Enable/disable the SNMP trap.
set trap
If it is enabled, and the operation as described in 5) above occurs, a trap is sent to the management console. The cold start and warm start traps are sent to the management console only after the system is started. In general, there is a delay of several minutes.
8. Display SNMP information
Show snmp
Configuration Example Suppose that the IP address of the network management server is 10.40.92.105, the switch has a layer 3 port with the IP address of 10.40.92.200, and the switch is managed through the network management server.
Create a community named “zte” with the read/write authority and the view named “zteview”, and then associate the community “zte” with the view “zteview”. Specify the IP address of the host receiving traps as 10.40.92.105, and the community as “zte”.
zte(cfg)#config router
zte(cfg-router)#set ipport 0 ipaddress 10.40.92.200
255.255.255.0
zte(cfg-router)#set ipport 0 vlan 2
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
180 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
zte(cfg-router)#set ipport 0 enable
zte(cfg-router)#exit
zte(cfg)#config snmp
zte(cfg-snmp)#create community zte private
zte(cfg-snmp)#create view zteview
zte(cfg-snmp)#set community zte view zteview
zte(cfg-snmp)#set traphost 10.40.92.105 zte
zte(cfg-snmp)#show snmp community
CommunityName Level ViewName
-------------- --------- ------------
zte private zteview
zte(cfg-snmp)#show snmp view
ViewName Exc/Inc MibFamily
----------- -------- ------------------------
zteview Include 1.3.6.1
zte(cfg-snmp)#show snmp host
HostIpAddress Community SNMPVersion
---------------- ----------- -----------
10.40.92.105 zte Ver.1
zte(cfg-snmp)#
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 181
RMON Introduction The Remote Monitoring (RMON) defines standard network monitoring function and the communication interface between the management console and the remote monitor. RMON offers an efficient and high availability method to monitor the behaviors of subnets in case of reducing the load of other agents and management stations.
RMON specifications refer to the definition of RMON MIB.ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S supports four groups of RMON MIB.
History: records the periodic statistics sample of the information that can be obtained from the statistics group.
Statistics: maintains the basic application and error statistics of each subnet that the agent monitors.
Event: it is a table related to all events generated by RMON agents.
Alarm: allows operators of the management console to set sampling interval and alarm threshold for any count or integer recorded by RMON agents.
All these groups are used to store the data collected by the monitor and the derived data and statistics. The alarm group is based on the implementation of the event group. These data can be obtained through the MIB browser.
The RMON control information can be configured through the MIB browser, and a HyperTerminal or remote Telnet command line. The RMON sampling information and statistics are obtained through the MIB browser.
Basic Configuration The following describes how to configure RMON control information through a HyperTerminal or remote Telnet.
1. Enable/disable the RMON function.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
182 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
set rmon
By default, the RMON function is disabled. The sampling of etherStatsTable information in the etherHistoryTable and statistics groups in the history group can be implemented only when the RMON function is enabled. During the sampling, the data sampling stops if the RMON function is disabled.
2. Create or configure instances of the history group.
set history
The command line configuration of the history group is to configure the historyControlTable in the history group. The configuration involves:
historyControlDataSource: It is the ifIndex oid in the rfc1213 interface group, for example, the oid of port 16 is 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.16. In command line configuration, enter the port number 16 directly.
historyControlBucketsRequested: By default, it is 50.
historyControlOwner.
historyControlInterval. By default, it is 1,800 seconds.
historyControlStatus: It can be “valid”, “underCreation”, “createRequest” and “invalid”. When it is set to “invalid”, the instance is deleted. The control status can be set to “valid” only when the data source is specified.
3. Create or configure instances of the statistics group.
set statistics
The command line configuration of the statistics group is to configure the etherStatsTable in the statistics group. The configuration involves:
etherStatsDataSource: It is the same as that of the history group. When configuring the data source through the command line, enter the port number directly.
etherStatsOwner
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 183
etherStatsStatus: It can be “valid”, “underCreation”, “createRequest” and “invalid”. When it is set to “invalid”, the instance is deleted. The control status can be set to “valid” only when the data source is specified.
4. Create or configure instances of the event group.
set event
The command line configuration of the event group is to configure the eventTable in the event group. The configuration involves:
eventDescription.
eventType: It can be “none(1)”, “log(2)”, “snmp-trap(3)” and “log-and-trap(4)”.When the “log” is selected, a log instance is created for each event in the logTable. When the “snmp-trap” is selected, for each event, the monitor sends an SNMP trap to one or more management stations. When the “log-and-trap” is selected, the log is created and a trap is sent.
eventOwner.
eventCommunity.
eventStatus: It can be “valid”, “underCreation”, “createRequest” and “invalid”. When it is set to “invalid”, the event instance is deleted.
5. Create or configure instances of the alarm group.
set alarm
The command line configuration of the alarm group is to configure the alarmTable in the alarm group. The configuration involves:
alarmInterval.
alarmVariable: It indicates the object identifier of a specific variable to be sampled in the local mib, for example, for sampling the etherHistoryBroadcastPkts, the variable value shall be 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.2.2.1.7.x.x, where, “x.x” indicates the sampling bucket of an instance of the history group.
alarmSampleType: The “absolute” indicates the absolute value, and “delta” indicates the relative value.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
184 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
alarmStartupAlarm: It can be “risingAlarm(1)”, “fallingAlarm(2)” and “risingOrFallingAlarm(3)”, which indicate that, after the instance becomes effective, the first sampling starts when the rising sampling value exceeds the threshold, the falling sampling value is lower than the threshold or both cases occur simultaneously.
alarmRisingThreshold.
alarmFallingThreshold.
alarmRisingEventIndex.
alarmFallingEventIndex.
alarmOwner.
alarmStatus: It can be “valid”, “underCreation”, “createRequest” and “invalid”. When it is set to “invalid”, the alarm instance is deleted.
The alarm variable can be configured only when the object to be sampled specified by the alarm variable can sample data. The status can be set to “valid” only when the alarm variable is configured successfully.
6. Query the RMON status and configuration information.
Display the RMON status.
show rmon
Display the configuration information about the history group.
show history
Display the configuration information about the statistic group.
show statistic
Display the configuration information about the event group.
show event
Display the configuration information about the alarm group.
show alarm
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 185
Configuration Example The following examples describe how to set event 2, history 2, alarm 2 and statistics 1 respectively.
zte(cfg-snmp)#set event 2 description It'sJustForTest!!
zte(cfg-snmp)#set event 2 type logandtrap
zte(cfg-snmp)#set event 2 community public
zte(cfg-snmp)#set event 2 owner zteNj
zte(cfg-snmp)#set event 2 status valid
zte(cfg-snmp)#set history 2 datasource 16
zte(cfg-snmp)#set history 2 bucket 3
zte(cfg-snmp)#set history 2 interval 10
zte(cfg-snmp)#set history 2 owner zteNj
zte(cfg-snmp)#set history 2 status valid
zte(cfg-snmp)#set rmon enable
zte(cfg-snmp)#set alarm 2 interval 10
zte(cfg-snmp)#set alarm 2 variable
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.16
zte(cfg-snmp)#set alarm 2 sample absolute
zte(cfg-snmp)#set alarm 2 startup rising
zte(cfg-snmp)#set alarm 2 threshold 8 eventindex 2
rising
zte(cfg-snmp)#set alarm 2 threshold 15 eventindex 2
falling
zte(cfg-snmp)#set alarm 2 owner zteNj
zte(cfg-snmp)#set alarm 2 status valid
zte(cfg-snmp)#set statistics 1 datasource 16
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
186 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
zte(cfg-snmp)#set statistics 1 owner zteNj
zte(cfg-snmp)#set statistics 1 status valid
Query configuration information about event 2:
zte(cfg-snmp)#show event 2
EventIndex : 2 Type : log-and-trap
Community : public Status: valid
LastTimeSent: 0 Owner : zteNj
Description : It'sJustForTest!!
zte(cfg-snmp)#
Query configuration information about history 2:
zte(cfg-snmp)#show history 2
ControlIndex : 2 BucketsRequest: 3
Interval : 10 BucketsGranted: 3
ControlStatus: valid ControlOwner : zteNj
DataSource : 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.16
zte(cfg-snmp)#
Query configuration information about alarm 2:
zte(cfg-snmp)#show alarm 2
AlarmIndex : 2 SampleType: absolute
Interval : 10 Value : 0
Threshold(R) : 8 Startup : risingAlarm
Threshold(F) : 15 Status : valid
EventIndex(R): 2 Variable :
1.3.6.1.2.1.16.2.2.1.6.2.1
EventIndex(F): 2 Owner : zteNj
zte(cfg-snmp)#
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 187
Query configuration information about statistics 1:
zte(cfg-snmp)#show statistics 1
StatsIndex: 1 Pkts :16 CRCAlignErrors : 0
DropEvents: 0 BroadcastPkts :1 Pkts65to127Octets : 0
Octets : 2236 MulticastPkts:15 Pkts128to255Octets : 15
Fragments : 0 UndersizePkts:0 Pkts256to511Octets : 1
Jabbers : 0 OversizePkts :0 Pkts512to1023Octets : 0
Collisions: 0 Pkts64Octets :0 kts1024to1518Octets: 0
Status : valid
Owner : zteNj
DataSource: 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.16
zte(cfg-snmp)#
After the above configuration, when the number of etherHistoryPkts of the first bucket of port 16 rises over 8 or the number falls below 15, the event with the index of 2 is triggered. The event with the index of 2 sends a trap to the management station, and creates a log simultaneously. This log can be queried in the logTable of the event group.
Cluster Management Introduction A cluster is a combination consisting of a set of switches in a specific broadcast domain. This set of switches forms a unified management domain, providing an external public network IP address and
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
188 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
management interface, as well as the ability to manage and access each member in the cluster.
The management switch which is configured with a public network IP address is called a command switch. Other switches serve as member switches. In normal cases, a member switch is not configured with a public network IP address. A private address is allocated to each member switch through the class DHCP function of the command switch. The command switch and member switches form a cluster (private network).
It is recommended that you isolate the broadcast domain between the public network and the private network on the command switch and shield direct access to the private address. The command switch provides an external management and maintenance channel to manage the cluster in a centralized manner.
In general, the broadcast domain where a cluster is located consists of switches in these roles: Command switch, member switches, candidate switches and independent switches.
One cluster has only one command switch. The command switch can automatically collect the device topology and set up a cluster. After a cluster is set up, the command switch provides a cluster management channel to manage member switches. Member switches serve as candidate switches before they join the cluster. The switches that do not support cluster management are called independent switches.
Figure 57 shows the cluster management networking.
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 189
F I G U R E 57 CL U S T E R M AN AG E M E N T N E T W O R K I N G
Public network
Independent switch Candidate switch
NM console110.1.1.1
TFTP Server110.1.1.2
Commandswitch
100.1.1.10
Cluster internalnetwork
Memberswitch Member switch
Memberswitch
Memberswitch
Memberswitch
Outside the cluster
Cluster internaladdress pool
192.168.1.0/24
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
190 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Figure 58 shows the changeover rule of the four roles of switches within a cluster.
F I G U R E 58 SW I T C H R O L E C H AN G E O V E R R U L E
Command switch
Candidate switch
Member switch
Independentswitch
Specified as a command switch Specified as a candidate switch(without member)
Specified as anindependent switch
Add to the clusterDelete from the cluster
Specified as a candidate switch
Specified as an independent switch(without member)
Specified as a command switch
Specified as a command switch
To configure the cluster management function, first use the config group command to enter the cluster management configuration mode.
ZDP Configuration ZDP (Discovery Protocol) is a protocol used to discover the related information about the direct neighbor node, including the adjacent device ID, device type, version and port information. This protocol supports the refreshing and aging of the neighbor device information table.
The ZDP configuration on the switch includes the following contents:
1. Enable/disable the system ZDP function.
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 191
set zdp
By default, the system ZDP function is enabled. When the system ZDP function is disabled, the contents of the neighbor device information table are cleared, and the ZDP packets processing is suspended.
2. Enable/disable the port ZDP function.
set zdp port
3. Enable/disable the trunk ZDP function.
set zdp trunk
By default, the ZDP functions of all ports/trunks are enabled. When the ZDP function of a port/trunk is disabled, the contents of the neighbor device information table of the port/trunk are cleared, and the ZDP packets processing is suspended.
Note: A port/trunk can collect and send ZDP information normally only when both the ZDP function of the port/trunk and the system ZDP function are enabled.
4. Set the valid time for holding ZDP information.
set zdp holdtime
5. Set the time interval for sending ZDP packets.
set zdp timer
6. Display the ZDP configuration.
show zdp
7. Display the neighbor device information table.
show zdp neighbour
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
192 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
ZTP Configuration The topology protocol (ZTP) is a protocol used to collect network topology information. With the neighbor device information table collected through ZDP, ZTP sends and forwards ZTP topology collection packets through the relevant port in the specified VLAN to collect the topology information in the network (hop count) within a specific range and to create a topology information table which is used for knowing network topology status and managing the cluster.
The ZTP configuration on the switch includes the following contents:
1. Enable/disable the system ZTP function.
set ztp
By default, the system ZTP function is enabled. When the system ZTP function is disabled, the contents of the switch topology information table are cleared, and the ZTP packets processing is suspended.
2. Enable/disable the port ZTP function.
set ztp port
3. Enable/disable the trunk ZTP function
set ztp trunk
By default, the ZTP function of all ports/trunks is enabled. If the ZTP function of a port/trunk is disabled, the ZTP packets processing of the port/trunk is suspended.
Note: A port/trunk can collect and send ZTP information normally only when both the ZTP function of the port/trunk and the system ZTP function are enabled.
4. Configure ZTP parameters.
Configure a VLAN for collecting topology information.
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 193
set ztp vlan
Set the range (hop count) of collecting topology information.
set ztp hop
Set the time interval for collecting topology information periodically.
set ztp timer
Set the hop delay for forwarding topology requests.
set ztp hopdelay
Set the port delay for forwarding topology requests.
set ztp portdelay
By default, the specified VLAN for collecting topology information is VLAN 1, and the topology collecting range is four hops. By default, the time interval for collecting topology information is 0 minute, that is, the topology information is not collected periodically.
When the switch is configured to be a command switch, the VLAN for collecting topology information serves as the management VLAN of the command switch. In this case, it is not allowed to change the specified VLAN for collecting topology information.
When the network delay is high, the hop delay and port delay of topology forwarding shall be modified to adapt the current network status.
To collect network topology information within a larger range, the administrator can increase the hop counts.
5. Manually start collecting topology information.
ztp start
To make it easy to know the network topology information at any time, the user can manually start the topology information collection procedure, without depending on the automatic topology information collection.
6. Display ZTP configuration.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
194 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
show ztp
7. Display details of the specified device according to the MAC address.
show ztp mac
8. Display the topology information table.
show ztp device
Note: The device ID offered by the topology information table is the temporary ID generated based on the current topology information collection result. With the purpose of facilitating the display and cluster management, it is effective to the current topology information collection result only.
Cluster Configuration After the command switch is specified, you can know the network topology information through ZDP/ZTP, and then manage and monitor the cluster.
The unique ID of a cluster consists of the VLAN where the cluster is located and the MAC address of the command switch.
1. Set switch roles.
Set candidate switches.
set group candidate
Set independent switches.
set group independent
Set a command switch, specify a layer 3 port number for cluster management and set the IP address pool for user cluster management.
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 195
set group commander ipport
After a candidate switch is added to the cluster by the command switch and becomes a member switch, the member switch cannot change itself to a candidate switch or command switch.
In setting the command switch, the VLAN to which the layer 3 port is bound shall be the specified VLAN for collecting topology information. Once a switch is configured to be a command switch, the specified VLAN for collecting topology information cannot be changed.
The command switch is allowed to be a candidate switch or independent switch only when the cluster has no member switch.
2. Add/delete a cluster member.
Add a member based on the device MAC address.
set group add mac
Add a member based on the device MAC address and specify the member ID.
set group add mac
Add a member based on the temporary device ID obtained from the collected topology information.
set group add device
Delete a device with the specified member ID from the cluster.
set group delete member
When a device is added to the cluster but the member ID is not specified, the system automatically allocates a unique ID to the member.
3. Configure cluster parameters.
Set cluster name.
set group name
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
196 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Set a time interval for the handshake between the command switch and the member switch.
set group handtime
Set the effective holding time of information about switches in the cluster.
set group holdtime
Set the IP address of the internal public TFTP Server of the cluster.
set group tftpsvr
The above parameters can be configured for the command switch only.
The effective holding time of the cluster means that when the command switch detects the communication failure of a member switch (or a member switch detects that of the command switch), and the communication is recovered within the effective holding time, the member status is normal; if the communication is not recovered after the effective holding time, the command switch displays that the member is in DOWN state. After the communication is recovered, the member is added to the cluster automatically and is displayed in UP status.
If the IP address of the TFTP Server of the cluster is configured, the member switch can access the TFTP Server by directly accessing the command switch.
4. Access and control cluster members.
Switch from the command switch to a specified member switch.
rlogin member
Switch from a member switch to the command switch.
rlogin commander
Download/upload versions through TFTP on the command switch.
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 197
tftp
Save the configuration of the specified member switch.
save member
Delete the configuration of the specified member switch.
erase member
Restart the specified member switch.
reboot member
5. Display the cluster configuration and cluster member information.
Display the cluster configuration information.
show group
Display candidate switches that can be added to the cluster.
show group candidate
Display cluster member information.
show group member
Configuration Example As shown in Figure 57, the initial configuration of the switches is the default configuration. Here, set the VLAN where the public network IP address of the command switch in the cluster is located to 2525, the IP address to 100.1.1.10/24, the gateway address to 100.1.1.1, the cluster management VLAN to 4000, the private address pool to 192.168.1.0/24, and the IP address of the TFTP Server of the whole cluster to 110.1.1.2.
The detailed configuration is as follows:
1. Configure the public network IP address of the command switch and the gateway.
WYXX(cfg)#set vlan 2525 enable
WYXX(cfg)#set vlan 2525 add port 1-16 tag
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
198 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
WYXX(cfg)#config router
WYXX(cfg-router)#set ipport 25 ipaddress 100.1.1.10/24
WYXX(cfg-router)#set ipport 25 vlan 2525
WYXX(cfg-router)#set ipport 25 enable
WYXX(cfg-router)#iproute 0.0.0.0/0 100.1.1.1
2. Create a cluster on layer 3 port 1 of the command switch and VLAN 1 (default VLAN).
WYXX(cfg)#config group
WYXX(cfg-group)#set group commander ipport 1 ip-pool
192.168.1.1/24
Cmdr.WYXX(cfg-group)#ztp start
Cmdr.WYXX(cfg-group)#show ztp device
Last collection vlan : 1
Last collection time : 188 ms.
Id MacAddress Hop Role Platform
--- ------------------ --- ----- ---------
0 00.d0.d0.fc.08.6c 0 cmdr ZXR10 2818S
1 00.d0.d0.fc.08.d6 1 candi ZXR10 2818S
2 00.d0.d0.fc.08.cf 1 candi ZXR10 2818S
3 00.d0.d0.fc.08.fa 1 candi ZXR10 2818S
4 00.d0.d0.fc.08.d5 1 candi ZXR10 2818S
5 00.d0.d0.fc.09.3a 1 candi ZXR10 2818S
Cmdr.WYXX(cfg-group)#set group add device 1-5
Adding device id : 1 ... Successed to add member!
Adding device id : 2 ... Successed to add member!
Adding device id : 3 ... Successed to add member!
Adding device id : 4 ... Successed to add member!
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 199
Adding device id : 5 ... Successed to add member!
Cmdr.WYXX(cfg-group)#show group member
MbrId MacAddress IpAddress Status
----- ----------------- ------------------- ----------
1 00.d0.d0.fc.08.d6 192.168.1.2/24 Up
2 00.d0.d0.fc.08.cf 192.168.1.3/24 Up
3 00.d0.d0.fc.08.fa 192.168.1.4/24 Up
4 00.d0.d0.fc.08.d5 192.168.1.5/24 Up
5 00.d0.d0.fc.09.3a 192.168.1.6/24 Up
3. Switch to each member switch and add all ports to VLAN 4000 (taking member 4 as an example)
Cmdr.WYXX(cfg)#set vlan 4000 enable
Cmdr.WYXX(cfg)#set vlan 4000 add port 1-16 tag
Cmdr.WYXX(cfg)#rlogin member 4
Trying ...Open
Connecting ...
Membr_4.zte>enable
Membr_4.zte(cfg)#set vlan 4000 enable
Membr_4.zte(cfg)#set vlan 4000 add port 1-16 tag
4. Delete the cluster created on VLAN 1.
Cmdr.WYXX(cfg-group)#set group delete member 1-5
Deleting member id : 1 ... Successed to del member!
Deleting member id : 2 ... Successed to del member!
Deleting member id : 3 ... Successed to del member!
Deleting member id : 4 ... Successed to del member!
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
200 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Deleting member id : 5 ... Successed to del member!
Cmdr.WYXX(cfg-group)#set group candidate
WYXX(cfg-group)#
5. Create a cluster on VLAN 4000.
WYXX(cfg-group)#set ztp vlan 4000
WYXX(cfg-group)#set group commander ipport 1 ip-pool
192.168.1.1/24
Cmdr.WYXX(cfg-group)#ztp start
Cmdr.WYXX(cfg-group)#show ztp device
Last collection vlan : 4000
Last collection time : 176 ms.
Id MacAddress Hop Role Platform
--- ------------------ --- ----- ---------
0 00.d0.d0.fc.08.6c 0 cmdr ZXR10 2818S
1 00.d0.d0.fc.08.d6 1 candi ZXR10 2818S
2 00.d0.d0.fc.08.cf 1 candi ZXR10 2818S
3 00.d0.d0.fc.08.fa 1 candi ZXR10 2818S
4 00.d0.d0.fc.08.d5 1 candi ZXR10 2818S
5 00.d0.d0.fc.09.3a 1 candi ZXR10 2818S
Cmdr.WYXX(cfg-group)#set group add device 1-5
Adding device id : 1 ... Successed to add member!
Adding device id : 2 ... Successed to add member!
Adding device id : 3 ... Successed to add member!
Adding device id : 4 ... Successed to add member!
Adding device id : 5 ... Successed to add member!
Chapter 8 - Network Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 201
Cmdr.WYXX(cfg-group)#show group member
MbrId MacAddress IpAddress Status
----- ---------------- ----------------- ----------
1 00.d0.d0.fc.08.d6 192.168.1.2/24 Up
2 00.d0.d0.fc.08.cf 192.168.1.3/24 Up
3 00.d0.d0.fc.08.fa 192.168.1.4/24 Up
4 00.d0.d0.fc.08.d5 192.168.1.5/24 Up
5 00.d0.d0.fc.09.3a 192.168.1.6/24 Up
6. Set the IP address of the TFTP Server in the cluster to 110.1.1.2.
Cmdr.WYXX(cfg-group)#set group tftpsvr 110.1.1.2
7. Download version kernel.Z on member 4.
Membr_4.zte(cfg-tffs)#tftp commander download kernel.Z
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 202
This page is intentionally blank.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 203
C h a p t e r 9
Maintenance
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Routine maintenance of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
Common test methods of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
Troubleshooting methods of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S
Routine Maintenance Routine maintenance generally refers to daily maintenance and monthly maintenance. The following describes them in detail.
Items of Daily Maintenance 1. Check the running status of the switch.
i. Query whether the background terminal interface can operate normally.
ii. Query whether the status of indicators of the switch is normal.
iii. Check whether the fan of the switch runs normally.
iv. Check whether the temperature of the switch is normal and whether there is any strange smell in the equipment room.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
204 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
v. Check system alarm information.
2. Check the communication status between the switch and each connected device.
Log in to the switch through a HyperTerminal or Telnet, and then use the ping command to test different network segments and check the connectivity.
3. Check whether the switch related services are normal.
4. Record the intraday operations and phenomenon.
Intraday operations refer to the operations performed on that day, and phenomenon shall include the status of the switch and environment of the equipment room.
Items of Monthly Maintenance 1. Summarize daily operations once a month.
i. Summarize questions encountered in routine operations and please discuss with ZTE maintenance personnel if necessary.
ii. Summarize and accumulate maintenance experiences in routine maintenance to conduct more efficient maintenance.
2. Clean the equipment room.
i. Pay attention to the cleanness of air conditioners and check the performance of the air conditioners at the same time.
ii. Clean the cabling trough, check whether the relevant lines are in poor contact and make adjustment in time.
3. Clean the switch.
Do not overwet the cleaning cloth. Make sure that the interfaces are not affected.
4. Back up the alarm data, statistic data and configuration data.
Chapter 9 - Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 205
Maintenance Period Table 12 shows the maintenance and test period of the Ethernet switch system for the reference of the maintenance personnel.
T AB L E 12 M AI N T E N AN C E AN D TE S T P E R I O D O F T H E E T H E R N E T S W I T C H S Y S T E M
No. Maintenance & Test Item Test Period
1 Check the running status of the switch. Daily
2 Check the temperature and humidity in the equipment room and check the power supply. Daily
3 Check the communication status between the switch and each connected device. Daily
4 Check whether the relevant services are well developed. Daily
5 Monthly summarization of routine maintenance problems. Monthly
6 Monthly summarization of routine maintenance experience. Monthly
7 Clean the equipment room. Monthly
8 Clean the switch. Monthly
9 Yearly summarization. Yearly
10 Completely maintain and check the equipment in the monitoring room. Yearly
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
206 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Common Test Methods Single-Port Loop Test The single-port loop test is to check whether a loop exists in the ports of the switch. If such a loop exists, it may result in errors in learning MAC addresses and may easily cause a broadcast storm. In worse cases, the switch and network may be down. Starting the single-port loop test and disabling the port with loop can efficiently avoid the influence caused by port loop.
The principle of the single-port loop test is as follows:
The switch sends a test packet through a port. If this test packet is received through the port without any change (or only a tag is attached), it indicates that a loop exists in this port.
The test packet sent by the switch includes the following three parameters:
Source MAC address: It indicates the MAC address of the switch. The MAC address of each switch is unique.
Port number: Port numbers correspond to the numbers of the ports on the switch one by one.
Discrimination field: For each switch, the digital signature of each port is different.
If the three parameters in the test packet sent through the port are the same as those in the test packet received through the port, a port loop absolutely exists.
The single-port loop test configuration on the switch involves:
1. Enable or disable the loop test function of the specified port.
set loopdetect port
By default, the port loop test function is disabled.
2. Enable or disable the loop test function of a trunk.
Chapter 9 - Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 207
set loopdetect trunk
By default, the loop test function of a trunk is disabled.
3. Enable or disable the loop test protection function of the specified port.
set loopdetect port protect
The loop test protection function means that the port is automatically blocked when it detects a loop. In this way, the influence caused by port loop is avoided.
4. Enable or disable the loop test protection function of a trunk.
set loopdetect trunk protect
5. Set the time for blocking the port with loop.
set loopdetect blockDelay
The time for blocking the port with loop refers to the time for blocking the port when a loop is detected, that is, the port protection time. The protection takes effect only when the loop test protection function of the port is enabled.
6. Display the port loop test configuration and port detection status.
show loopdetect
If the port cannot work normally, you can use show loopdetect to observe whether a port loop exists. If no loop is detected and the spanning tree of the port is enabled, you can eliminate the fault according to the status of the spanning status.
Virtual Circuit Test The virtual circuit test (VCT) uses the time domain reflectometer (TDR) to diagnose the circuit. This test enables you to diagnose the circuit error status, such as Open, Short, Impedance Mismatch and
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
208 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Good termination, and to obtain the distance of the errored circuit with the fitted empirical formula.
You can use the show vct port command on the switch to query the VCT result of the specified port.
For interface modules in extended slots, this switch only supports the VCT of the gigabit electrical interface. For other interface modules, the VCT is not supported.
Common Troubleshooting By type, the faults include software faults and hardware faults. Hardware faults, if accurately located, usually can be cleared by replacing the hardware. Software and configuration faults can be cleared through proper operations.
In troubleshooting, check whether the device configuration is correct, whether the cables are connected correctly and whether the required environment is satisfied according to the related description in the above sections.
The following describes the common faults of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S and relevant troubleshooting methods in detail.
Failed to Configure through the Console Port 1. Fault symptom
The switch cannot be configured through the console port.
2. Related components check
Check the configuration cable, the serial port of the HyperTerminal and the console port of the switch.
3. Fault analysis and location
Chapter 9 - Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 209
i. The configuration cable connection is incorrect.
ii. The serial port attributes of the HyperTerminal are configured incorrectly, and the serial port fails.
iii. The console port of the switch fails.
4. Troubleshooting
i. Use proper configuration cables. For the connections of configuration cables, see
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
210 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Installing Configuration Cables.
ii. Check the settings of serial port attributes of the HyperTerminal. The correct settings shall be as follows:
Bit/s (baud rate): “9600”.
Data bit: “8”.
Parity check: “none”.
Stop bit: “1”.
Data stream control: “none”.
Check whether the serial port of the HyperTerminal is normal, and replace the configuration terminal.
iii. Check whether the console port of the switch is normal.
Failed to Connect Through Telnet 1. Fault symptom
The switch cannot to be accessed through Telnet.
2. Fault analysis and location
i. The PVID of the port is configured incorrectly.
ii. The port is disabled.
iii. The VLAN bound with the IP port is disabled.
iv. No valid IP address, subnet mask and default gateway are configured for the switch.
v. The IP address of the switch conflicts with the IP address of another device in the network.
3. Troubleshooting
i. Modify the PVID of the port to be consistent with the related VLAN ID.
ii. Enable the port.
iii. Enable the VLAN bound with the IP port.
Chapter 9 - Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 211
iv. Configure a valid IP address, subnet mask and default gateway for the switch.
v. Modify the IP address of the switch or that of the other device to eliminate the IP address conflict.
Failed to Log In to the Switch Through Telnet 1. Fault symptom
The remote terminal can access but cannot log in to the switch through Telnet, and the system prompts the user that no password is configured.
2. Fault analysis and location
The login password of the switch is set to null.
3. Troubleshooting
Set a non-null login password.
Missing User Name or Password 1. Fault symptom
The user cannot log in to the switch after entering the user name and password.
2. Fault analysis and location
In logging in to the switch, the entered user name or password is incorrect.
3. Troubleshooting
First, confirm whether the system administrator can find the original user name and password. If the user name and password cannot be found, restart the switch and delete the configuration file. The detailed procedure is as follows:
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
212 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
i. Restart the switch, and press any key according to the prompt to enter the boot status in the HyperTerminal.
Welcome to use ZTE eCarrier!!
Copyright(c) 2004-2006, ZTE Co., Ltd.
System Booting......
CPU: WindBond ARM7TDMI
Version: VxWorks5.5.1
BSP version: 1.2/0
Creation date: May 23 2005, 00:07:21
Press any key to stop auto-boot...
6
[ZxR10 Boot]:
ii. In the boot status, enter <zte> to enter the [BootManager] status of the switch. Enter <?> to get command help.
[ZxR10 Boot]: zte
Load wbdEnd Begin
W90N740 MAC0: 10MB - Full Duplex
Board 2818s !
Marvell has been initialized !
boot device : wbdEnd
Chapter 9 - Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 213
unit number : 0
processor number : 0
host name : tiger
file name : vxWorks
inet on ethernet (e) : 10.40.89.106
host inet (h) : 10.40.89.78
gateway inet (g) : 10.40.89.78
flags (f) : 0x80
Attached TCP/IP interface to wbdEnd0.
Warning: no netmask specified.
Attaching network interface lo0... done.
Attaching to TFFS...
test flash passed perfectly!
Welcome to boot manager!
Type ‘?’ for help
[BootManager]:?
ls */Lists the current
directories/*
pwd */Displays the current
absolute path/*
devs */Displays the FLASH memory
informaiton/*
show */Displays the switch type
and MAC address/*
reboot */Restarts the switch/*
format */Formats the FLASH
memory/*
del file_name */Deletes the specified
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
214 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
file/*
md dir_name */Creates a directory/*
mf file_name */Creates a file/*
cd absolue-pathname */Changes the current
directory/*
tftp ip_address file_name */Uploads/downloads the
version through TFTP/*
update file_name */Upgrades boot/*
rename file_name newname */Rename a file/*
[BootManager]:
iii. Run the del command to delete the configuration file, and then restart the switch.
[BootManager]:ls
KERNEL
RUNNING.CFG
[BootManager]:del running.cfg
[BootManager]:reboot
iv. After the switch is restarted, use the default user name and password to log in to the switch.
Please Press any Key to Start!
Welcome !
ZTE Corporation.
All rights reserved.
login:admin
password: *********
zte>en
Chapter 9 - Maintenance
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 215
password :
zte(cfg)#
Missing enable Password 1. Fault symptom
The user cannot enter the global configuration mode after logging in to the switch and entering the password.
2. Fault analysis and location
The password used for entering the global configuration mode is invalid.
3. Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting method is the same as that described in Missing User Name or Password.
4. Precautions
Before restarting the switch, record the current configuration of the switch. It is useful for reconfiguration.
Failed to Interconnect Two Devices in the Same VLAN 1. Fault symptom
The two devices connected to the two ports of the switch in the same VLAN cannot be interconnected.
2. Fault analysis and location
i. The PVID of the port is configured incorrectly.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
216 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
ii. The port is disabled.
iii. The VLAN is disabled.
iv. The tag is selected when the port is added to the VLAN.
3. Troubleshooting
i. Modify the PVID of the port to be consistent with the related VLAN ID.
ii. Enable the port.
iii. Enable the VLAN.
iv. Add the port to the VLAN and select untag.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 217
C h a p t e r 10
Command Reference
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Commands of the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S.
Functions, modes, format, parameters and application of the commands.
Introduction Table 13 shows the parameters commonly used in the commands.
T AB L E 13 P AR AM E T E R D E S C R I P T I O N
Parameter Description
<portlist>
Comma separated port number, port name or port number range. For example: 1, 2, 4-8, 18 p1, pp2, 4-8, port18
p1, pp2 and port18 are names of the ports created by the user.
<vlanlist>
Comma separated VLAN ID, VLAN name or VLAN range. For example: 1-19, 77, 88, 100-900 vlan1, v1, 10, 100-200
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
218 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
<trunklist> Comma separated trunk ID or trunk range. For example: 1-19, 77, 88, 100-900
<portname> It indicates that only one port number or port name can be entered at a time.
<vlanname> It indicates that only one VLAN ID or VLAN name can be entered at a time.
<trunkid> It indicates that only one trunk ID can be entered at a time.
<xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx> MAC address, for example, 11.22.33.44.55.66.
<A.B.C.D> IP address, for example, 10.40.47.254
<A.B.C.D/M> Digits of the IP address and mask. “M” is an integer ranging 1~32, for example, 10.40.47.254/24.
<string> A character string without space.
<mib-oid> Variable number in dotted decimal notation, for example, 1.3.6.2.19.2.
<name> A character string without space.
Management Commands adminpass Function: To set the password for entering the global configuration mode.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: adminpass [<string>]
Parameter:
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 219
Parameter Description
<string> The password for entering the configuration mode.
Note: If adminpass is entered directly without a string, it indicates that the management password is set to null.
Example: Set the password for entering the global configuration mode to administrator.
adminpass administrator
config router Function: To enter the layer 3 configuration mode.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: config router
config snmp Function: To enter the SNMP configuration mode.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: config snmp
config tffs Function: To enter the file system configuration mode.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: config tffs
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
220 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
create User Function: To create a management user.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: create user <name>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<name> The name of the management user.
Example: Create a user named “userx”.
create user userx
delete User Function: To delete a management user.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: delete user <name>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<name> The name of the management user.
Example: Delete a user named “userx”.
delete user userx
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 221
enable Function: To enter the global configuration mode from the user mode.
Mode: User mode
Format: enable
Note: After the enable command is executed, the system prompts the user to enter the management password (use the adminpass command to set it).
exit Function: To exit from the current mode to the previous mode.
Mode: All modes
Format: exit
hostname Function: To set or change the host name.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: hostname <name>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<name> Host name.
Example: Set the host name to “hello”.
hostname hello
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
222 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
line-vty Function: To set the timeout time for Telnet user login.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: line-vty timeout <1-1080>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-1080> Timeout time. The unit is minute. By default, it is 10 minutes.
list Function: To list all commands available in the current mode.
Mode: All modes
Format: list
loginpass Function: To set the login password.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: loginpass [<string>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<string> Login password.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 223
Note: If loginpass is entered directly without a string, it indicates that the login password is set to null. In this case, the Telnet user cannot log in to the system.
Example: Set the login password to “ok”.
loginpass ok
ping Function: To test the connectivity of the network.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: ping <A.B.C.D> [<0-65535>] [<0-65535>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<A.B.C.D> Destination IP address.
<0-65535> The times of sending the echo request.
<0-65535> The delay of waiting for response.
readconfig Function: To read the switch configuration from the config.txt file.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: readconfig
reboot Function: To restart the switch.
Mode: Global configuration mode
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
224 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Format: reboot
saveconfig Function: To save the configuration information.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: saveconfig
set date Function: To set the date and time.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set date <yyyy-mm-dd> time <hh:mm:ss>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<yyyy-mm-dd> Date (year/month/day).
<hh:mm:ss> Time (hour/minute/second).
Note that after the switch is restarted, the date and time shall be reconfigured.
set loginauth Function: To set the login authentication mode.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set loginauth {local|radius}
Parameter:
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 225
Parameter Description
local Sets local authentication for the login user.
radius Sets the RADIUS authentication for the login user.
set specialVlan1 Function: To enable/disable the special management of vlan1.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set specialVlan1 [enable|disable]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
enable Enables the special management of vlan1.
disable Disables the special management of vlan1.
show date-time Function: To display the current date and time.
Mode: All modes
Format: show date-time
Note: If no date and time are configured, the time starts from 2004-07-01 by default.
show loginauth Function: To display the login authentication mode.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
226 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Mode: All modes
Format: show loginauth
show running-config Function: To display all current non-default configurations of the system.
Mode: All modes
Format: show running-config [toFile]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
[toFile] Outputs the show running-config result to the config.txt file.
show specialVlan1 Function: To display the configuration information about specialVlan1.
Mode: All modes
Format: show specialVlan1
show start-config Function: To display all non-default configurations of the system saved last time.
Mode: All modes
Format: show start-config
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 227
show terminal Function: To display the monitoring and log information about terminals.
Mode: All modes
Format: show terminal [log]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
[log] Displays log information.
Note: It is used to display the on/off status of the monitor and log.
show vct Function: To display the VCT result of the port.
Mode: All modes
Format: show vct port <portname>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portname> A port number.
show user Function: To display information and the current name of the user logging in through Telnet.
Mode: All modes
Format: show user
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
228 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
sysLocation Function: To set the location information about the switch.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: sysLocation <string>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<string> Location of the switch.
terminal log Function: To enable/disable the log.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: terminal log {on|off}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
on Enables log.
off Disables log.
terminal monitor Function: To enable/disable printing real-time alarm information to the terminal.
Mode: Global mode
Format: terminal monitor {on|off}
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 229
Parameter:
Parameter Description
on Enables printing real-time alarm information.
off Disables printing real-time alarm information.
version Function: To display system information including version, running time and MAC address of the switch.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: version
File System cd Function: To change the current directory.
Mode: File system configuration mode
Format: cd <name>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<name> Name of the directory.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
230 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Example: Enter the config directory in the file system.
cd config
copy Function: To copy a file.
Mode: File system configuration mode
Format: copy <name> <name>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<name> Name of the source file path/destination file path.
Example 1: Copy the v1.txt file in the root directory to the \bak directory.
copy v1.txt bak\v1.txt
Example 2: Copy the a.txt file in the \\test directory to the \\temp directory.
copy \\test\a.txt \\temp\a.txt
format Function: To format the Flash memory.
Mode: File system configuration mode
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 231
Format: format
ls Function: To display the current directory list.
Mode: File system configuration mode
Format:
md Function: To create a directory.
Mode: File system management mode
Format: md <name>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<name> Name of the directory.
Example: Create the directory “group”.
md group
remove Function: To delete a specified file or directory.
Mode: File system configuration mode
Format: remove <name>
Parameter:
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
232 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
<name> Name of the file or directory.
Example: Delete the directory “group”.
remove group
rename Function: To rename a file.
Mode: File system configuration mode
Format: rename <name> <name>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<name> Name of the source file/destination file.,
Example: Rename the configbak.txt file to config.txt.
rename configbak.txt config.txt
tftp Function: To download/upload a version through TFTP.
Mode: File system configuration mode
Format: tftp {<A.B.C.D>|commander} {download|upload} <name>
Parameter:
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 233
Parameter Description
<A.B.C.D> IP address of the specified host.
commander Command switch.
download Downloads a file from the host to the FLASH memory.
upload Uploads a file from the FLASH memory to the host.
<name> Name of the file.
Example: Download version.o from 10.40.44.167 to the switch.
tftp 10.40.44.167 download version.o
Port Configuration clear port Function: To clear the name/statistics data of a port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: clear port <portlist> {name|statistics|description}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
name Clears the name of the port.
statistics Clears the statistics data of the port.
description Clears the description of the port.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
234 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Example: Clear names of ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 11.
clear port 1,5-7,11 name
create port name Function: To create a port name.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: create port <portname> name <name>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portname> A port number.
<name> Port name.
Note that the range of parameter <portname> is 1~9 on the ZXR10 2609, 1~18 on the ZXR10 2818S, 1~26 on the ZXR10 2826S, and 1~52 on the ZXR10 2852S.
Example: Create the name userx for port 1.
create port 1 name userx
set port Function: To enable/disable a port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 235
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables the port.
disable Disables the port.
Example: Enables ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 11.
set port 1,5-7,11 enable
set port auto Function: To enable/disable the adaptive function of a port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> auto {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables the adaptive function of the port.
disable Disables the adaptive function of the port.
Example: Enable the adaptive function of ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 11.
set port 1,5-7,11 auto enable
set port bandwidth Function: To set port bandwidth.
Mode: Global configuration mode
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
236 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Format: set port <portlist> bandwidth ingress {off|on rate <64-256000>}{tcpdrop|flowcontrol}
set port <portlist> bandwidth egress {off|on rate <64-256000>}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
ingress Set the input bandwidth.
egress Set the output bandwidth.
off Disables the bandwidth restriction.
on Enables the bandwidth restriction.
tcpdrop TCP connection mode.
flowcontrol Traffic control connection mode.
<64-256000> The rate ranges from 64 kbps to 256000 kbps.
Example: Set the input bandwidth of ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 11 to 1000 kbps.
set port 1,5-7,11 bandwidth ingress on rate 1000
set port dscp-priority Function: To enable/disable the layer 3 DSCP priority of a port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> dscp-priority {enable|disable}
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 237
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables the layer 3 DSCP priority of a port.
disable Disables the layer 3 DSCP priority of a port.
Note that the layer 3 DSCP priority can be used to determine the priority of data packets only when the received data packets are IP data packets and the layer 3 DSCP priority of the port is enabled. The queue priority of data packets is determined in the queue priority table according to the IP DSCP priority.
set port default-priority Function: To set the default priority of a port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> default-priority <0-7>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
<0-7> Default port priority.
set port description Function: To set the description of a port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portname> description <string>
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
238 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portname> Port list.
<string> Description of the port.
Note that the range of parameter <portname> is 1~9 on the ZXR10 2609, 1~18 on the ZXR10 2818S, 1~26 on the ZXR10 2826S, and 1~52 on the ZXR10 2852S.
set port duplex Function: To set the working mode of a port to full duplex/half duplex.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> duplex {full|half}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
full The working mode of a port is full duplex.
half The working mode of a port is half duplex.
Example: Set the working modes of ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 11 to full duplex.
set port 1,5-7,11 duplex full
set port flowcontrol Function: To enable/disable the flow control of a port.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 239
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> flowcontrol {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables the flow control of a port.
disable Disables the flow control of a port.
Example: Enable the flow control of ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 11.
set port 1,5-7,11 flowcontrol enable
set port ingress_limit_mode Function: To set the bandwidth restriction mode of a port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format:
set port <portlist> ingress_limit_mode {all|nonunicast|multi-broadcast|broadcast}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
all Set the ingress restriction filter type to all data packets.
nonUnicast Set the ingress restriction filter type to non-unicast data packets.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
240 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
multi-broadcast Set the ingress restriction type to broadcast and multicast data packets.
broadcast Set the ingress restriction filter type to broadcast data packets.
set port macaddress Function: To set the MAC address learning number of a port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> macaddress <0-16>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
<0-16> The number of learned MAC addresses of the port. “0” indicates that the number is not set.
set port multicast-filter Function: To enable/disable the multicast packet filter of a port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> multicast-filter {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 241
Parameter Description
enable Enables the multicast packet filter, namely, multicast packets are discarded.
disable Disables the multicast packet filter, namely, multicast packets are forwarded.
Example: Set ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 11 for forwarding multicast packets.
set port 1,5-7,11 multicast-filter disable
set port poe Function: To set the external power supply mode of a port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> poe {auto|force|never}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
auto Set the power supply mode to “auto”.
force Set the power supply mode to “force”.
never Set the power supply mode to “never”.
Example: Set the power supply mode of port 1 to “auto”.
set port 1 poe auto
set port priority Function: To set port priority control.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
242 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> default-priority <0-7>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
<0-7> Priority value.
Example: Set the priority of ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 11 to 3.
set port 1,5-7,11 default-priority 3
set port remapping-tag Function: To set 802.1P user priority remapping table of a port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> remapping-tag <0-7> priority <0-7>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
<0-7> Remapping-tag value. It can any value from 0 to 7.
<0-7> Priority value. It can be any value from 0 to 7.
Note that when a data packet received by the port is a TAG packet, the switch first uses this remapping table to remap the priority in the data packet, and then uses the priority of the new priority of the 802.1P user to determine future priority.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 243
The default values of the remapping table are 0 0, 1 1, 2 2, 3 3, 4 4, 5 5, 6 6 and 7 7.
Example: Set the priority value of “remapping-tag 3” in the 802.1P user priority remapping table of ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 11 to 2.
set port 1,5-7,11 remapping-tag 3 priority 2
set port sa-priority Function: To enable/disable the source MAC address priority.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> sa-priority {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables the source MAC address priority of the port.
disable Disables the source MAC address priority of the port.
set port security Function: To enable/disable port address learning.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> security {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
244 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Disables port address learning, and does not forward packets.
disable Enables port address learning and forwards packets.
Example: Disable the address learning of ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 11.
set port 1,5-7,11 security enable
set port speed Function: To set the port rate to 10 Mbps/100 Mbps/1000 Mbps.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> speed {10|100|1000}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
10 The port rate is 10 Mbps.
100 The port rate is 100 Mbps.
1000 The port rate is 1000 Mbps.
Example: Set the rate of ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 11 to 10 Mbps.
set port 1,5-7,11 speed 10
set port speedadvertise Function: To set the port speed advertisement.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 245
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> speedadvertise {maxspeed|speed 10|speed 100|speed 1000} {fullduplex|halfduplex}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
maxspeed Sets the port speed advertisement to maximum speed.
speed 10 Sets the port speed advertisement to 10 Mbps.
speed 100 Sets the port speed advertisement to 100 Mbps.
speed 1000 Sets the port speed advertisement to 1000 Mbps.
fullduplex Full duplex mode.
halfduplex Half duplex mode.
set port user-priority Function: To enable/disable the 802.1P user priority.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> user-priority {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables the 802.1P user priority of the port.
disable Disables the 802.1P user priority of the port.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
246 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
set port vlan-priority Function: To enable/disable the VLAN priority.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> vlan-priority {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables the port VLAN priority.
disable Disables the port VLAN priority.
set trunk multicast-filter Function: To enable/disable the trunk multicast packet filter.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set trunk <trunklist> multicast-filter {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<trunklist> Trunk list.
enable Enables the multicast packet filter, namely, multicast packets are discarded.
disable Disables the multicast packet filter, namely, multicast packets are discarded.
Example: Set trunk 1 multicast packet forwarding.
set trunk 1 multicast forward
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 247
Note that the range of parameter <trunklist> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
show port Function: To display port configuration and the working status.
Mode: All modes
Format: show port [<portlist>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
Example: Display the configuration and working status of ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 11.
show port 1,5-7,11
show port qos Function: To display the QoS configuration information about a port.
Mode: All modes
Format: show port <portlist> qos
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
Example: Display the QoS configuration data of ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 11.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
248 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
show port 1,5-7,11 qos
show port statistics Function: To display port statistics.
Mode: All modes
Format: show port <portlist> statistics
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
Example: Display the statistics data of ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 11.
show port 1,5-7,11 statistics
show trunk Function: To display the trunk configuration.
Mode: All modes
Format: show trunk [<trunklist>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<trunklist> Trunk ID list.
Example: Display the configuration of trunks 1, 5, 6 and 7.
show trunk 1,5-7
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 249
Port Mirroring set mirror add source-port Function: To add an ingress/egress mirroring port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set mirror add source-port <portlist> {ingress|egress}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
ingress Ingress.
egress Egress.
Example: Add the egress mirror of ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 12.
set mirror add port 1,5-7,12 egress
set mirror delete source-port Function: To delete an ingress/egress mirroring port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set mirror delete source-port <portlist> {ingress|egress}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
250 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
ingress Ingress.
egress Egress.
Example: Delete the ingress mirror of ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 12.
set mirror delete port 1,5-7,12 ingress
set mirror dest-port Function: To set an ingress/egress monitoring port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set mirror dest-port <portname> {ingress|egress}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portname> A port number or port name.
Note that the range of parameter <portname> is 1~9 on the ZXR10 2609, 1~18 on the ZXR10 2818S, 1~26 on the ZXR10 2826S, and 1~52 on the ZXR10 2852S.The switch supports one ingress monitoring port and one egress monitoring port.
Example: Set an ingress monitoring port.
set mirror dest-port 1
show mirror Function: To display mirroring configuration information.
Mode: All modes
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 251
Format: show mirror
VLAN Configuration clear vlan name Function: To clear a VLAN name.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: clear vlan <vlanlist> name
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanlist> VLAN list.
Example: Clear the names of VLAN 1, 5, 6, 7 and 12.
clear vlan 1,5-7,12 name
create vlan name Function: To create a VLAN name.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: create vlan <1-4094> name <name>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-4094> VLAN ID. The range is 1~4094.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
252 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
<name> VLAN name.
Example: Set the name of vlan 1 to group1.
create vlan 1 name group1
set port pvid Function: To set the PVID of a port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set port <portlist> pvid <1-4094>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
<1-4094> Default VLAN ID. The range is 1~4094.
Example: Set the PVID of ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 11 to 30.
set port 1,5-7,11 pvid 30
set trunk pvid Function: To set the PVID of a trunk.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set trunk < trunklist > pvid <1-4094>
Parameter:
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 253
Parameter Description
< trunklist > Trunk list.
<1-4094> Default VLAN ID. The range is 1~4094.
Example: Set the PVID of trunk 1, 2 and 3 to 1000.
set trunk 1-3 pvid 1000
Note that the range of parameter <trunklist> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
set vlan Function: To enable/disable a VLAN.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set vlan <vlanlist> {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanlist> VLAN list.
enable Enables the VLAN.
disable Disables the VLAN.
Example: Enable VLAN 1, 5, 6, 7 and 12.
set vlan 1,5-7,12 enable
set vlan add port Function: To add a port to a VLAN.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
254 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set vlan <vlanlist> add port <portlist> [tag|untag]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanlist> VLAN list.
<portlist> Port list.
tag Attaches a tag.
untag Does no tag. By default, “untag” is selected.
Example: Add ports 2, 8, 9, 10 and 18 with tag to VLAN 1, 5, 6, 7 and 12.
set vlan 1,5-7,12 add port 2,8-10,18 tag
set vlan add trunk Function: To add the specified trunk to a VLAN.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set vlan <vlanlist> add trunk <trunklist> [tag|untag]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanlist> VLAN list.
<trunklist> Trunk list.
tag Attach a tag.
untag Does not tag. By default, “untag” is selected.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 255
Note: The range of parameter <trunklist> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
Example: Add trunk 1 with tag to VLAN 1, 5, 6, 7 and 12.
set vlan 1,5-7,12 add trunk 1 tag
set vlan delete port Function: To delete the specified port from a VLAN.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set vlan <vlanlist> delete port <portlist>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanlist> VLAN list.
<portlist> Port list.
Example: Disable ports 2, 9, 10, 11 and 16 in VLAN 1, 5, 6, 7 and 12.
set vlan 1,5-7,12 delete port 2,9-11,16
set vlan delete trunk Function: To delete the specified trunk from a VLAN.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set vlan <vlanlist> delete trunk <trunklist>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
256 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
<vlanlist> VLAN list.
<trunklist> Trunk list.
Example: Delete trunk 1 from VLAN 1, 5, 6, 7 and 12.
set vlan 1,5-7,12 delete trunk 1
Note that the range of parameter <trunklist> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
set vlan fid Function: To set the FID of a VLAN.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set vlan <vlanlist> fid <1-256>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanlist> VLAN list.
<1-256> FID. The range is 1~256.
Example: Set the FID of VLAN 1, 5, 6, 7 and 12 to 1.
set vlan 1,5-7,12 fid 1
set vlan priority Function: To set VLAN priority.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set vlan <vlanlist> priority {off|on <0-7>}
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 257
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanlist> VLAN list.
off Disables the VLAN priority.
on Enables the VLAN priority.
<0-7> Value of the VLAN priority.
Example: Set the priority of VLAN 1, 5, 6, 7 and 12 to 3.
set vlan 1,5-7,12 priority on 3
show vlan Function: To display VLAN information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show vlan [<vlanlist>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanlist> VLAN list.
Example 1: Display information about all VLANs.
show vlan
Example 2: Display information about VLAN 1, 5, 6, 7 and 12.
show vlan 1,5-7,12
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
258 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
MAC Address Table Configuration set fdb add Function: To add a static binding address to the address table.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set fdb add <xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx> fid <1-256> {port <portname>|trunk <trunkid>} [priority <0-7>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<<xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx> MAC address.
<1-256> FID. The range is 1~256.
<portname> A port number or port name.
< trunkid > Trunk ID.
< 0-7 > Priority value.
Note that the range of parameter <portname> is 1~9 on the ZXR10 2609, 1~18 on the ZXR10 2818S, 1~26 on the ZXR10 2826S, and 1~52 on the ZXR10 2852S.
The range of parameter <trunkid> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
Example 1: Add 00.00.00.00.11.22 to the address table, and set the FID to 1, the port number to 1, and the priority value to 3.
set fdb add 00.00.00.00.11.22 fid 1 port 1 priority 3
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 259
Example 2: Add 00.00.00.00.11.22 to the address table, and set the FID to 1, and the port name to “userx”.
set fdb add 00.00.00.00.11.22 fid 1 port userx
Example 3: Add 00.00.00.00.11.22 to the address table, and set the FID to 1, and trunk to 1.
set fdb add 00.00.00.00.11.22 fid 1 trunk 1
set fdb agingtime Function: To set the address aging time. By default, the value is 240.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set fdb agingtime <15-3600>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<15-3600> Aging time. The range is 15~3600. The unit is second.
Example: Set the address aging time to 100s.
set fdb agingtime 100
set fdb delete Function: To delete a record from the address table.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set fdb delete <xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx> fid <1-256>
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
260 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx> MAC address.
<1-256> FID. The range is 1~256.
Example: Delete the fdb entry with the MAC address of 00.00.00.00.11.22 and the FID of 1 from the address table.
set fdb delete 00.00.00.00.11.22 fid 1
set fdb filter Function: To set the fdb filter address.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set fdb filter <xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx> fid <1-256>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx> MAC address.
<1-256> FID. The range is 1~256.
Example: Set the fdb filter address to 00.00.00.00.11.22, and the FID to 1.
set fdb filter 00.00.00.00.11.22 fid 1
show fdb Function: To display fdb information.
Mode: All modes
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 261
Format: show fdb [static|dynamic|filter] [detail]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
static Displays the number of static fdb entries.
dynamic Displays the number of dynamic fdb entries.
filter Displays the number of static filter fdb entries.
detail: Displays details of a type of fdb entries.
Note that the ZXR10 2852S does not support the show fdb, show fdb detail, show fdb dynamic and show fdb dynamic detail commands.
show fdb agingtime Function: To display the aging time of the fdb address table.
Mode: All modes
Format: show fdb agingtime
show fdb dynamic port Function: To display fdb information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show fdb dynamic port <portname> {detail}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portname> A port number or port name.
detail Displays details of a type of fdb entries.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
262 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Note that this command is available for the ZXR10 2852S only.
show fdb mac Function: To display the fdb information about a MAC address.
Mode: All modes
Format: show fdb mac <xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<<xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx> MAC address.
show fdb port Function: To display the fdb information about a port.
Mode: All modes
Format: show fdb port <portname>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portname> A port number.
show fdb vlan Function: To display the fdb information about a VLAN.
Mode: All modes
Format: show fdb vlan <vlanname>
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 263
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanname> A VLAN ID or VLAN name.
Note that the ZXR10 2852S does not support this command.
show fdb vlan port Function: To display the fdb information about a VLAN.
Mode: All modes
Format: show fdb vlan <vlanname> port <portname>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanname> A VLAN ID or VLAN name.
<portname> A port number.
Note that this command is available for the ZXR10 2852S only.
LACP Configuration set lacp Function: To enable/disable the LACP.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set lacp {enable|disable}
Parameter:
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
264 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
enable Enables the LACP
disable Disables the LACP.
set lacp aggregator add port Function: To add the specified port to an LACP aggregation group.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set lacp aggregator <trunkid> add port <portlist>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<trunkid> Aggregation group number.
<portlist> Port list. Up to four ports can be aggregated.
Example: Add ports 1, 5, 6 and 7 to aggregation group 1.
set lacp aggregator 1 add port 1,5-7
Note that the range of parameter <trunkid> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
set lacp aggregator delete port Function: To delete the specified port from an LACP aggregation group.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set lacp aggregator <trunkid> delete port <portlist>
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 265
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<trunkid> Aggregation group number.
<portlist> Port list.
Example: Delete ports 1, 5, 6 and 7 from aggregation group 1.
set lacp aggregator 1 delete port 1,5-7
Note that the range of parameter <trunkid> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
set lacp aggregator mode Function: To set LACP aggregation mode.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set lacp aggregator <trunkid> mode {dynamic|static | mixed }
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<trunkid> Aggregation group number.
static The aggregation mode is static.
dynamic The aggregation mode is dynamic.
mixed The aggregation mode is mixed.
Example: Set the LACP aggregation mode of aggregation group 1 to “dynamic”.
set lacp aggregator 1 mode dynamic
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
266 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Note: The range of parameter <trunkid> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
set lacp port mode Function: To set LACP port aggregation mode.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set lacp port <portlist> mode {active|passive}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
active The LACP port is in active negotiation mode.
passive The LACP port is in passive negotiation mode.
Example: Set the LACP aggregation mode of ports 1, 5, 6 and 7 to active negotiation mode.
set lacp port 1,5-7 mode active
set lacp port timeout Function: To set LACP port timeout status.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set lacp port <portlist> timeout {long|short}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
short The port is in short timeout.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 267
Parameter Description
long The port is in long timeout.
Example: Set aggregation ports 1, 5, 6 and 7 to long timeout.
set lacp port 1,5-7 timeout long
set lacp priority Function: To set the LACP priority.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set lacp priority <1-65535>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-65535> Priority. The range is 1~65535. By default, it is 32768.
Example: Set the LACP priority to 100.
set lacp priority 100
show lacp Function: To display LACP configuration information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show lacp
show lacp aggregator Function: To display LACP aggregation group information.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
268 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Mode: All modes
Format: show lacp aggregator [<trunkid>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<trunkid> Aggregation group number.
Example 1: Display information about all LACP aggregation groups.
show lacp aggregator
Example 2: Display information about LACP aggregation group 1.
show lacp aggregator 1
show lacp port Function: To display information about an LACP aggregation port.
Mode: All modes
Format: show lacp port [<portlist >]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
Example 1: Display information about all LACP aggregation ports.
show lacp port
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 269
Example 2: Display information about LACP aggregation ports 1, 5, 6 and 7.
show lacp port 1,5-7
IGMP Snooping Configuration set igmp snooping Function: To enable/disable multicast snooping.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set igmp snooping {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
enable Enables multicast snooping.
disable Disables multicast snooping.
set igmp snooping add vlan Function: To add a multicast snooping VLAN.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set igmp snooping add vlan <vlanlist>
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
270 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanlist> VLAN list.
Example: Add multicast snooping VLAN 1, 5, 6, 7 and 12.
set igmp snooping add vlan 1,5-7,12
set igmp snooping crossvlan Function: To enable/disable multi-VLAN multicast snooping.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set igmp snooping crossvlan {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
enable Enables multi-VLAN multicast snooping.
disable Disables multi-VLAN multicast snooping.
Example: Enable multi-VLAN multicast snooping.
set igmp snooping crossvlan enable
set igmp snooping delete vlan Function: To delete a multicast snooping VLAN.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set igmp snooping delete vlan <vlanlist>
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 271
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanlist> VLAN list.
Example: Delete multicast snooping VLAN 1, 5, 6, 7 and 12.
set igmp snooping delete vlan 1,5-7,12
set igmp snooping fastleave Function: To enable/disable snooping fastleave.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set igmp snooping fastleave {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
enable Enables fastleave.
disable Disables fastleave.
set igmp snooping lastmember_query Function: To set last member query interval.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set igmp snooping lastmember_query <10-250>
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
272 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<10-250> Last member query interval. The unit is 1/10 second. By default, it is 10 (1s).
Example: Set last member query interval to 10s.
set igmp snooping lastmember_query 100
set igmp snooping query vlan Function: To enable/disable multicast polling for a VLAN.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set igmp snooping query vlan <vlanlist> {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanlist> VLAN list. It only includes multicast VLANs.
enable Enables multicast polling.
disable Disables multicast polling.
Example: Enable multicast polling for VLAN 1, 7 and 12.
set igmp snooping query vlan 1,7,12 enable
set igmp snooping query_interval Function: To set a query interval.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 273
Format: set igmp snooping query_interval <10-2147483647>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<10-2147483647> The query interval. The unit is 1/10 second. By default, it is 1250 (125s).
Example: Set the query interval to 100s.
set igmp snooping query_interval 1000
set igmp snooping response_interval Function: To set the query response interval.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set igmp snooping response_interval <10-250>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<10-250> The query response interval. The unit is 1/10 second. By default, it is 100 (10s).
Example: Set the query response interval to 12s.
set igmp snooping response_interval 120
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
274 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
set igmp snooping timeout Function: To set the multicast member/router timeout.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set igmp snooping timeout <100-2147483647> {host|router}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<100-2147483647> Timeout time. The unit is 1/10 second. By default, it is 2600 (260s).
host Sets the member timeout.
router Sets the router timeout.
Example: Set the multicast member timeout to 100s.
set igmp snooping timeout 1000 host
set igmp snooping vlan add group Function: To add a static multicast group to the specified VLAN.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set igmp snooping vlan <vlanname> add group <A.B.C.D>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanname> A VLAN ID or VLAN name.
<A.B.C.D> IP address. The range is 224.x.x.x~239.x.x.x, excluding 224.0.0.x.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 275
Example 1: Add the static multicast group 230.40.44.167 to vlan 1.
set igmp snooping vlan 1 add group 230.40.44.167
Example 2: Add the static multicast group 230.40.44.167 to the VLAN named “group1”.
set igmp snooping vlan group1 add group 230.40.44.167
set igmp snooping vlan delete group Function: To delete a static multicast group from the specified VLAN.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set igmp snooping vlan <vlanname> delete group <A.B.C.D>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanname> A VLAN ID or VLAN name.
<A.B.C.D> IP address. The range is 224.x.x.x~239.x.x.x, excluding 224.0.0.x.
Example 1: Delete the static multicast group 230.40.44.167 from vlan 1.
set igmp snooping vlan 1 delete group 230.40.44.167
Example 2: Delete the static multicast group 230.40.44.167 from the VLAN named “group1”.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
276 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
set igmp snooping vlan group1 delete group 230.40.44.167
show igmp snooping Function: To display the multicast snooping configuration.
Mode: All modes
Format: show igmp snooping
show igmp snooping vlan Function: To display multicast snooping results.
Mode: All modes
Format: show igmp snooping vlan [<vlanname> [host|router]]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanname> A VLAN ID or VLAN name.
host Displays the member snooping results.
router Displays the router snooping results.
Example 1: Display the multicast snooping results of all VLANs.
show igmp snooping vlan
Example 2: Display the multicast snooping results of vlan 1.
show igmp snooping vlan 1
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 277
Example 3: Display the multicast snooping results of the VLAN named “group1”.
show igmp snooping vlan group1
Example 4: Display the multicast router snooping results of vlan 1.
show igmp snooping vlan 1 router
MSTP Configuration clear stp instance Function: To delete an instance.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: clear stp instance <1-15>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-15> Instance number. The range is 0~15.
Example: Delete instance 1.
clear stp instance 1
clear stp name Function: To delete an STP area name.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
278 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: clear stp name
set stp Function: To enable/display STP. By default, STP is disabled.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
enable Enables STP.
disable Disables STP.
set stp agemax Function: To set the STP aging time.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp agemax <6-40>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<6-40> STP aging time. The unit is second.
Example: Set the STP aging time to 30s.
set stp agemax 30
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 279
set stp edge-port Function: To add/delete an STP edge port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp edge-port {add|delete} port <portlist>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
Example: Set port 1 as the STP edge port.
set stp edge-port add port 1
set stp forceversion Function: To set the forced STP type to mstp/rstp/stp.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp forceversion {mstp|rstp|stp}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
mstp Sets the forced STP type to mstp.
rstp Sets the forced STP type to rstp.
stp Sets the forced STP type to stp.
Example: Set the forced STP type to stp.
set stp forceversion stp
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
280 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
set stp forwarddelay Function: To set the STP forwarding delay.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp forwarddelay <4-30>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<4-30> STP forwarding delay. The unit is second.
Example: Set the STP forwarding delay to 10s.
set stp forwarddelay 10
set stp hellotime Function: To set the STP notification interval.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp hellotime <1-10>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-10> STP notification interval. The unit is second.
Example: Set the STP notification interval to 6s.
set stp hellotime 6
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 281
set stp hmd5-digest Function: To set the hmd5-digest value.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp hmd5-digest <0x00..0-0xff..f>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0x00..0-0xff..f> A 32-bit hexadecimal value.
set stp hmd5-key Function: To set the hmd5-key value.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp hmd5-key <0x00..0-0xff..f>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0x00..0-0xff..f> A 32-bit hexadecimal value.
set stp hopmax Function: To set the maximum hop count between any two terminals of the MST.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp hopmax <1-40>
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
282 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-40> Maximum hop count between any two terminals of the MST.
Example: Set the maximum hop count between any two terminals of the MST to 30.
set stp hopmax 30
set stp instance bridgeprio Function: To set the instance bridge priority.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp instance <0-15> bridgeprio <0-61440>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-15> Instance number. The range is 0~15.
<0-61440> Bridge priority. The range is 0~61440.
Note that the priority shall be in multiples of 4096. If the inputted value is not in multiples of 4096, the system automatically converts the priority value to the nearest multiple of 4096.
Example: Set the bridge priority in instance 1 to 4096.
set stp instance 1 bridgeprio 4096
set stp instance port cost Function: To set the instance port cost.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 283
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp instance <0-15> port <portname> cost <1-200000000>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-15> Instance number. The range is 0~15.
<portname> A port number.
<1-200000000> Post cost.
Note that the range of parameter <portname> is 1~9 on the ZXR10 2609, 1~18 on the ZXR10 2818S, 1~26 on the ZXR10 2826S, and 1~52 on the ZXR10 2852S.
Example: Set the cost of port 1 in instance 1 to 20000.
set stp instance 1 port 1 cost 20000
set stp instance port priority Function: To set the instance port priority.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp instance <0-15> port <portname> priority <0-255>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-15> Instance number. The range is 0~15.
<portname> A port number.
<0-255> Priority.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
284 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Note that the range of parameter <portname> is 1~9 on the ZXR10 2609, 1~18 on the ZXR10 2818S, 1~26 on the ZXR10 2826S, and 1~52 on the ZXR10 2852S.
Example: Set the priority of port 1 in instance 1 to 100.
set stp instance 1 port 1 priority 100
set stp instance trunk cost Function: To set the instance trunk cost.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp instance <0-15> trunk < trunkid > cost <1-200000000>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-15> Instance number. The range is 0~15.
< trunkid > Trunk ID.
<1-200000000> Trunk cost.
Note that the range of parameter <trunkid> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
Example: Set the cost of trunk1 in instance 1 to 20000.
set stp instance 1 trunk 1 cost 20000
set stp instance trunk priority Function: To set the instance trunk priority.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 285
Format: set stp instance <0-15> trunk < trunkid > priority <0-255>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-15> Instance number. The range is 0~15.
< trunkid > Trunk ID.
<0-255> Priority.
Note that the range of parameter <trunkid> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
Example: Set the priority of trunk1 in instance 1 to 100.
set stp instance 1 trunk 1 priority 100
set stp instance vlan Function: To set the mapping relationship between the VLAN and instance.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp instance <0-15>[add|delete] vlan <vlanlist>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-15> Instance number. The range is 0~15.
<vlanlist> VLAN list.
Example: Set the mapping relationship among instance 1 and vlan 1, 5, 6, 7 and 12.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
286 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
set stp instance 1 add vlan 1,5-7,12
set stp name Function: To set an MST area name.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp name <name>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<name> MST area name.
Example: Set the MST area name to education.
set stp name education
set stp port Function: To enable/disable STP on a port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp port <portlist> {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables STP.
disable Disables STP.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 287
set stp port linktype Function: To set the port connection type.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp port <portlist> linktype {point-point|shared}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
point-point The port connection type is point-to-point.
shared The port connection type is shared
set stp port packettype Function: To set the port packet type.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp port <portlist> packettype {IEEE|CISCO|HUAWEI|HAMMER}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
IEEE IEEE mode.
CISCO CISCO mode.
HUAWEI Huawei mode.
HAMMER Harbour mode.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
288 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
set stp relay Function: To enable/disable STP Relay.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp relay {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
enable Enables STP Relay
disable Disables STP Relay
set stp revision Function: To set the MST version number.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp revision <0-65535>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-65535> MST version number. The value range is 0~65535.
Example: Set the MST version number to 10.
set stp revision 10
set stp trunk Function: To enable/disable STP on a trunk.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 289
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp trunk <trunkid> {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
< trunkid > Trunk ID.
enable Enables STP.
disable Disables STP.
Note that the range of parameter <trunkid> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
set stp trunk linktype Function: To set the trunk connection type.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp trunk < trunkid > linktype {point-point|shared}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
< trunkid > Trunk ID.
point-point The trunk connection type is point-to-point.
shared The trunk connection type is shared.
Note that the range of parameter <trunkid> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
set stp trunk packettype Function: To the set trunk packet type.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
290 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set stp trunk < trunkid >
packettype {IEEE|CISCO|HUAWEI|HAMMER}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
< trunkid > Trunk ID
IEEE IEEE mode.
CISCO CISCO mode.
HUAWEI Huawei mode.
HAMMER Harbour mode.
Note that the range of parameter <trunkid> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
show stp Function: To display STP information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show stp
show stp instance Function: To display STP instance information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show stp instance [<0-15>]
Parameter:
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 291
Parameter Description
<0-15> Instance number. The range is 0~15.
Example 1: Display information about all STP instances.
show stp instance
Example 2: Display information about STP instance 1.
show stp instance 1
show stp port Function: To display STP port information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show stp port [<portlist>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
Example 1: Display information about all STP ports.
show stp port
Example 2: Display information about STP ports 1, 5, 6, 7 and 12.
show stp port 1,5-7,12
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
292 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
show stp trunk Function: To display STP trunk information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show stp trunk < trunkid >
Parameter:
Parameter Description
< trunkid > Trunk ID
Example: Display information about STP trunk 1.
show stp trunk 1
QoS Configuration set qos queue-schedule Function: To set the queue scheduling mode.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set qos queue-schedule {sp|wfq}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
sp Sp mode.
wfq Wfq mode.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 293
Example: Set the queue scheduling mode to sp.
set qos queue-schedule sp
set qos priority-map user-priority Function: To set the mapping of the 802.1P user priority into the queue priority.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set qos priority-map user-priority <0-7> traffic-class <0-3>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-7> Priority of the 802.1P user.
<0-3> Queue priority.
Example 1: Set the mapping of the 802.1P user priority into the queue priority 2.
set qos priority-map user-priority 3 traffic-class 2
set qos priority-map ip-priority Function: To set the mapping of a layer 3 DSCP priority to the queue priority.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set qos priority-map ip-priority <0-63> traffic-class <0-3>
Parameter:
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
294 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
<0-63> Layer 3 DSCP priority.
<0-3> Queue priority.
Example 1: Set the mapping of the layer 3 DSCP priority 13 into the queue priority 2.
set qos priority-map ip-priority 13 traffic-class 2
show qos queue-schedule Function: To display the qos queue configuration.
Mode: All modes
Format: show qos queue-schedule
show qos priority-map Function: To display the mapping of the QoS 802.1P user priority into the queue priority and the mapping of the layer 3 DSCP priority into the queue priority.
Mode: All modes
Format: show qos priorty-map {user-priority|ip-priority}
PVLAN Configuration set pvlan session Function: To add/delete an isolated/shared port to/from the PVLAN.
Mode: All modes
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 295
Format: set pvlan session <id> {add|delete} {isolated-port|promiscuous-port} <portlist>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<id> At present, only one PVLAN is supported, therefore, the session value must be 1.
add Adds an isolated port or a shared port.
delete Deletes an isolated port or a shared port.
isolated-port The isolated port.
|promiscuous-port The shared port.
<portlist> Port list.
Note that the range of parameter <portlist> is 1~9 on the ZXR10 2609, 1~18 on the ZXR10 2818S, 1~26 on the ZXR10 2826S, and 1~52 on the ZXR10 2852S.
show pvlan Function: To display the PVLAN configuration.
Mode: All modes
Format: show pvlan
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
296 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
802.1x Transparent Transmission Configuration set 802.1xrelay Function: To enable/disable the 802.1x transparent transmission function.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set 802.1xrelay {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
enable Enables the 802.1x transparent transmission function.
disable Disables the 802.1x transparent transmission function.
show 802.1xrelay Function: To display the 802.1x transparent transmission configuration.
Mode: All modes
Format: show 802.1x relay
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 297
Layer 3 Configuration arp add Function: To add the static address resolution.
Mode: Layer 3 configuration mode
Format: arp add <A.B.C.D> <xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx> <0-63> <vlanname>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<A.B.C.D> IP address.
<xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx> MAC address.
<0-63> Layer 3 port number.
<vlanname> A VLAN ID or VLAN name.
Note that the IP address must be within the IP subnet of the specified IP port. The VLAN ID must be a VLAN ID which is bound with this IP port.
Example 1: Add the static address resolution 10.40.44.167, MAC address 00.00.00.00.11.22, layer 3 port 1 and vlan 1.
arp add 10.40.44.167 00.00.00.00.11.22 1 1
Example 2: Add the static address resolution 10.40.44.167, MAC address 00.00.00.00.11.22, layer 3 port 1 and the VLAN named “group1”.
arp add 10.40.44.167 00.00.00.00.11.22 1 group1
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
298 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
arp delete Function: To delete the static address resolution.
Mode: Layer 3 configuration mode
Format: arp delete <A.B.C.D>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<A.B.C.D> IP address.
Example: Delete the static address resolution of 10.40.44.167.
arp delete 10.40.44.167
arp ipport timeout Function: To set the layer 3 port timeout time.
Mode: Layer 3 configuration mode
Format: arp ipport <0-63> timeout <1-1000>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-63> A layer 3 port number.
<1-1000> Timeout time. The unit is minute. By default, it is 10 minutes.
Example: Set the timeout time of layer 3 port 1 to 100 minutes.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 299
arp ipport 1 timeout 100
clear arp Function: To delete all ARP information.
Mode: Layer 3 configuration mode
Format: clear arp
Note that this command is used to delete all ARP information from the switch. Use this command with caution.
clear ipport Function: To delete the ipport configuration.
Mode: Layer 3 configuration mode
Format: clear ipport <0-63> [mac|ipaddress {<A.B.C.D/M>|<A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D>}|vlan <vlanname>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-63> A layer 3 port number.
<A.B.C.D/M> IP address and mask.
<A.B.C.D> IP address/mask.
<vlanname> A VLAN ID or VLAN name.
Note that the command for clearing the IP port configuration is used when the port is down. The command restores the default values of the port (IP address: 0.0.0.0, MAC address: 00.00.00.00.00.00, bound VLAN: vlan 0).
Example 1: Delete the configuration of layer 3 port 1.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
300 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
clear ipport 1
Example 2: Delete the MAC address of layer 3 port 1.
clear ipport 1 mac
Example 3: Delete the IP address 10.40.44.167 and the mask 255.255.255.0 of layer 3 port 1.
clear ipport 1 ipaddress 10.40.44.167/24
clear ipport 1 ipaddress 10.40.44.167 255.255.255.0
Example 4: Delete vlan1 of layer 3 port 1.
clear ipport 1 vlan 1
Example 5: Delete the VLAN named “group1” of layer 3 port 1.
clear ipport 1 vlan group1
clear iproute Function: To delete a static route.
Mode: Layer 3 configuration mode
Format: clear iproute [{<A.B.C.D/M>|<A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D>} <A.B.C.D>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<A.B.C.D/M> IP address and mask.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 301
Parameter Description
<A.B.C.D> IP address/mask/gateway.
Note that this command can delete all configured static routes, and the deleted routes cannot be restored.
Example 1: Delete all static routes.
clear iproute
Example 2: Delete the static route to the network at 10.40.44.0/24 and the gateway at 10.40.44.12.
clear iproute 10.40.44.0/24 10.40.44.12
clear iproute 10.40.44.0 255.255.255.0 10.40.44.12
iproute Function: To add a static route.
Mode: Layer 3 configuration mode
Format: iproute {<A.B.C.D/M>|<A.B.C.D> < A.B.C.D>} < A.B.C.D> [<0-15>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<A.B.C.D/M> IP address and mask.
<A.B.C.D> IP address/mask/gateway.
<0-15> Metric. By default, it is 0.
Example: Add a static route to the network (10.40.44.0/24), with the gateway at 10.40.44.255 and the metric 3.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
302 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
iproute 10.40.44.0/24 10.40.44.255 3
iproute 10.40.44.0 255.255.255.0 10.40.44.255 3
set ipport Function: To enable/disable a layer 3 port.
Mode: Layer 3 configuration mode
Format: set ipport <0-63> {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-63> Number of a layer 3 port.
enable Enables a layer 3 port.
disable Disables a layer 3 port.
Note that to enable a layer-port, the IP address and VLAN data of the port shall already be configured. You do not have to configure the MAC address.
Example 1: Enable layer 3 port 1.
set ipport 1 enable
Example 2: Disable layer 3 port 1.
set ipport 1 disable
set ipport ipaddress Function: To set the IP address and mask of a layer 3 port.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 303
Mode: Layer 3 configuration mode
Format: set ipport <0-63> ipaddress {<A.B.C.D/M>|<A.B.C.D> < A.B.C.D>}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-63> Number of a layer 3 port.
<A.B.C.D/M> IP address and mask.
<A.B.C.D> IP address/mask.
Note: If an IP port is already configured with an IP address, you can use this command to replace the IP address with a new one.
Example: Set the IP address of layer 3 port 1 to 10.40.44.167, and the mask to 255.255.255.0.
set ipport 1 ipaddress 10.40.44.167/24
set ipport 1 ipaddress 10.40.44.167 255.255.255.0
set ipport mac Function: To set the MAC address of a layer 3 port.
Mode: Layer 3 configuration mode
Format: set ipport <0-63> mac <xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-63> Number of a layer 3 port.
<xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx> MAC address.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
304 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Note: The range of the MAC address is from 00.d0.d0.f0.00.00 to 00.d0.d0.ff.ff.ff. If this item is not configured, the MAC address is the MAC address of the switch. If an IP port is already configured with a MAC address, you can use this command to replace the MAC address with a new one.
Example: Set the MAC address of layer 3 port 1 to 00.d0.d0.f0.11.22.
set ipport 1 mac 00.d0.d0.f0.11.22
set ipport vlan Function: To set the VLAN bound with a layer 3 port.
Mode: Layer 3 configuration mode
Format: set ipport <0-63> vlan <vlanname>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-63> Number of a layer 3 port.
<vlanname> A VLAN ID or VLAN name.
Note that if an IP port is bound with a VLAN, you can use this command to replace the VLAN value with a new one.
Example 1: Set vlan 1 bound with layer 3 port 1.
set ipport 1 vlan 1
Example 2: Set the VLAN named “group1” bound with layer 3 port 1.
set ipport 1 vlan group1
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 305
show arp Function: To display the ARP information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show arp [static|dynamic|invalid|ipport <0-63> {static|dynamic|invalid} |ipaddress <A.B.C.D>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-63> Number of a layer 3 port.
<A.B.C.D> IP address
Example 1: Display information about all ARPs.
show arp
Example 2: Display invalid ARP information.
show arp invalid
Example 3: Display the static ARP information about layer 3 port 1.
show arp ipport 1 static
Example 4: Display the ARP information about the IP address 10.40.44.167.
show arp ipaddress 10.40.44.167
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
306 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
show ipport Function: To display the layer 3 port information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show ipport [<0-63>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-63> Number of a layer 3 port.
Example 1: Display information about all layer 3 ports.
show ipport
Example 2: Display information about layer 3 port 1.
show ipport 1
show iproute Function: To display all static routes.
Mode: All modes
Format: show iproute
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 307
Access Service Configuration aaa-control port accounting Function: To enable/disable the port accounting.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: aaa-control port <portlist> accounting {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables the port accounting.
disable Disables the port accounting.
aaa-control port dot1x Function: To enable/disable the 802.1x access to a port.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: aaa-control port <portlist> dot1x {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables the dot1x access to the port.
disable Disables the dot1x access to the port.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
308 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
aaa-control port keepalive Function: To enable/disable the abnormal offline test of a port.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: aaa-control port <portlist> keepalive {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables the abnormal offline test of the port.
disable Disables the abnormal offline test of the port.
aaa-control port keepalive period Function: To set the abnormal offline test period of a port.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: aaa-control port <portlist> keepalive period <1-3600>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
<1-3600> The abnormal offline test period of the port. The unit is second. By default, it is 10 seconds.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 309
aaa-control port max-hosts Function: To set the maximum number of accessed subscribers.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: aaa-control port <portlist> max-hosts <0-64>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
<0-64> Maximum number of accessed subscribers. By default, it is 0.
Note that if the maximum number of accessed subscribers is 0, it indicates that the number of subscribers with access to the port is not restricted. In this case, the number of accessed subscribers is restricted by the maximum number of subscribers that are allowed for access to the switch.
aaa-control port multiple-hosts Function: To enable/disable the multi-subscriber access to a port.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: aaa-control port <portlist> multiple-hosts {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables the multi-subscriber access to a port.
disable Disables the multi-subscriber access to a port.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
310 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
aaa-control port port-mode Function: To set the authentication control mode of a port.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: aaa-control port <portlist> port-mode {auto|force-unauthorized| force-authorized}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
auto The automatic authentication mode is used. It is the default mode.
force-unauthorized The forced un-authentication mode is used.
force-authorized The forced authentication mode is used.
aaa-control port protocol Function: To set the authentication mode of a port.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: aaa-control port <portlist> protocol {pap|chap|eap-md5}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
pap: The port authentication mode is pap.
chap: The port authentication mode is chap.
eap-md5 The port authentication mode is eap-md5. It is
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 311
Parameter Description
the default authentication mode.
dot1x max-request Function: To set the timeout retransmission times for the authentication system to receive challenge response from the client system.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: dot1x max-request <1-10>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-10> Timeout retransmission times. By default, it is 2.
dot1x quiet-period Function: To set the interval between one authentication failure and the next authentication request being received by the authentication system.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: dot1x quiet-period <0-65535>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-65535> Time interval. The unit is second. By default, it is 60 seconds.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
312 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
dot1x re-authenticate Function: To enable/disable the re-authentication mechanism.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: dot1x re-authenticate {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
enable Enables the re-authentication mechanism.
disable Disables the re-authentication mechanism.
dot1x re-authenticate period Function: To set the re-authentication period.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: dot1x re-authenticate period <1-4294967295>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-4294967295> Time interval. The unit is second. By default, it is 3600 seconds.
dot1x server-timeout Function: To set the timeout time for the authentication system to received data packets from the authentication server.
Mode: NAS mode
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 313
Format: dot1x server-timeout <1-65535>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-65535> Time interval. The unit is second. By default, it is 30 seconds.
dot1x supplicant-timeout Function: To set the timeout time for the authentication system to received data packets from the authentication client system.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: dot1x supplicant-timeout <1-65535>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-65535> Time interval. The unit is second. By default, it is 30 seconds.
dot1x tx-period Function: To set the time for the authentication system waits for retransmitting EAPOL data packets when it cannot receive response from the client system.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: dot1x tx-period <1-65535>
Parameter:
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
314 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
<1-65535> Time interval. The unit is second. By default, it is 30 seconds.
clear client Function: To delete all users of a client.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: clear client
clear client index Function: To delete a user of a client.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: clear client index <0-63>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-63> User number.
clear client port Function: To delete a client user on a port.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: clear client port <portlist>
Parameter:
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 315
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
clear client vlan Function: To delete all client users on a VLAN.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: clear client vlan <vlantlist>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<vlanlist> VLAN list.
radius isp Function: To add/delete an ISP.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: radius isp <ispname> {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<ispname> ISP domain name.
enable Adds an ISP.
disable Deletes an ISP.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
316 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
radius isp add accounting Function: To add an accounting server to the domain.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: radius isp <ispname> add accounting <A.B.C.D> [<0-65535>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<ispname> ISP domain name.
<A.B.C.D> IP address.
<0-65535> The UDP port of the accounting server. By default, it is 1813.
radius isp add authentication Function: To add an authentication server to the domain.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: radius isp <ispname> add authentication <A.B.C.D> [<0-65535>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<ispname> ISP domain name.
<A.B.C.D> IP address.
<0-65535> The UDP port the authentication server. By default, it is 1812.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 317
radius isp defaultisp Function: To set/cancel a domain as a default domain.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: radius isp <ispname> defaultisp {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<ispname> ISP domain name.
enable Sets the ISP domain as the default ISP domain.
disable Cancels the ISP domain as the default ISP domain.
radius isp delete accounting Function: To delete an accounting server from a domain.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: radius isp <ispname> delete accounting <A.B.C.D>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<ispname> ISP domain name.
<A.B.C.D> IP address.
radius isp delete authentication Function: To delete an authentication server from a domain.
Mode: NAS mode
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
318 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Format: radius isp <ispname> delete authentication <A.B.C.D>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<ispname> ISP domain name.
<A.B.C.D> IP address.
radius isp description Function: To configure the domain description.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: radius isp <ispname> description <string>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<ispname> ISP domain name.
<string> ISP domain description.
radius isp client Function: To set the radius client address.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: radius isp <ispname> client <A.B.C.D>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<ispname> ISP domain name.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 319
Parameter Description
<A.B.C.D> IP address.
radius isp fullaccount Function: To specify/cancel the full account for a domain.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: radius isp <ispname> fullaccount {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<ispname> ISP domain name.
enable Enables the full account of the ISP domain.
disable Disables the full account of the ISP domain.
radius isp sharedsecret Function: To configure the shared password of a domain.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: radius isp <ispname> sharedsecret <string>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<ispname> ISP domain name.
<string> Shared password.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
320 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
radius nasname Function: To set the NAS name.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: radius nasname <nasname>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<nasname> NAS name.
radius retransmit Function: To set the retransmission times of remote authentication requests.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: radius retransmit <1-255>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-255> Retransmission times. By default, it is 3.
radius timeout Function: To set the retransmission interval of remote autehnticaiton requests.
Mode: NAS mode
Format: radius timeout <1-255>
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 321
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-255> Retransmission interval. The unit is second. By default, it is 3 seconds.
show aaa-control port Function: To display the configuration information about the AAA control policy.
Mode: All modes
Format: show aaa-control port [<portlist>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
show dot1x Function: To display the dot1x configuration information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show dot1x
show client Function: To display information about all accessed users.
Mode: All modes
Format: show client
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
322 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
show client index Function: To display information about an accessed user.
Mode: All modes
Format: show client index <0-63>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-63> User number.
show client mac Function: To display the user access information about a MAC address.
Mode: All modes
Format: show client mac <xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx> MAC address.
show client port Function: To display the user access information about a port.
Mode: All modes
Format: show client port <portlist>
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 323
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
show radius Function: To display the RADIUS configuration information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show radius [<ispname>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<ispname> ISP domain name.
QinQ Configuration set qinq customer port Function: To add/delete a customer port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set qinq customer port <portlist> {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
324 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Example: Set ports 1, 2, 3 and 4 as customer ports.
set qinq customer port 1-4 enable
set qinq tpid Function: To set the tpid of the external layer label.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set qinq tpid <tpid>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<tpid> The external label value (0xaaaa) used in QinQ.
Example: Set the tpid of the external layer label to 0x8910.
set qinq tpid 0x8910
set qinq uplink port Function: To add/delete an uplink port.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set qinq uplink port <portlist> {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 325
Example: Set port 24 as an uplink port.
set qinq uplink port 24 enable
show qinq Function: To display the QinQ configuration information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show qinq
Parameter: None.
Example: Display the QinQ configuration information.
show qinq
Remote-access Configuration clear remote-access all Function: To delete all remote-access IP addresses.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: clear remote-access all
clear remote-access ipaddress Function: To delete a remote-access IP address.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
326 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: clear remote-access ipaddress <A.B.C.D> [<A.B.C.D>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<A.B.C.D> IP address.
set remote-access Function: To set remote access through Telnet.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set remote-access {any|specific}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
any It indicates that any IP address is available for access to the switch through Telnet.
specific It indicates that only the specific IP address is available for access to the switch through Telnet.
set remote-access ipaddress Function: To set the IP address for remote access through Telnet.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set remote-access ipaddress <A.B.C.D> [<A.B.C.D>]
Parameter:
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 327
Parameter Description
<A.B.C.D> IP address and mask.
show remote-access Function: To display remote-access information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show remote-access
SSH Configuration set ssh Function: To enable/disable the SSH function.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set ssh {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
enable Enables the SSH function.
disable Disables the SSH function.
show ssh Function: To display the SSH configuration and status.
Mode: All modes
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
328 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Format: show ssh
SNMP Configuration clear community Function: To delete a community name.
Mode: SNMP configuration mode
Format: clear community <name>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<name> Community name.
Example: Delete the community name seu.
clear community seu
clear traphost Function: To delete the traphost.
Mode: SNMP configuration mode
Format: clear traphost <A.B.C.D>
Parameter:
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 329
Parameter Description
<A.B.C.D> IP address.
Example: Delete the traphost at 10.40.44.167.
clear traphost 10.40.44.167
clear view Function: To delete a view name.
Mode: SNMP configuration mode
Format: clear view <name>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<name> View name.
Example: Delete the view name “school”.
clear view school
create community Function: To create a community name and set the authority.
Mode: SNMP configuration mode
Format: create community <name> {public|private}
Parameter:
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
330 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
<name> Community name.
public The attribute of the community name is read-only.
private The attribute of the community name is read-write.
Example: Create a community name “seu” with the read-write attribute.
create community seu private
create view Function: To create a view name and determine whether the view contains a mib subtree.
Mode: SNMP configuration mode
Format: create view <name> [{include|exclude} <mib-oid>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<name> View name.
<mib-oid> Information path.
Note: If “{include|exclude} <mib-oid>” is not specified, the view contains 1.3.6.1 by default.
Example: Create the view name “school”, excluding 1.3.6.2.19.2.
create view school exclude 1.3.6.2.19.2
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 331
set community view Function: To specify that the view contains the specified community name.
Mode: SNMP configuration mode
Format: set community <name> view <name>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<name> Community name/view name.
Example: Set the view “school” which contains seu.
set community seu view school
set trap Function: To enable/disable such traps as link interruption, link setup, link authentication failure, cold start, hot start, cluster topology change and cluster member Up/Down of the SNMP.
Mode: SNMP configuration mode
Format: set trap {linkdown|linkup|authenticationfail|coldstart|warmstart |topologychange|memberupdown} {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
linkdown The link is down.
linkup The link is set up.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
332 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
authenticationfail The link authentication fails.
coldstart Cold start.
warmstart Hot start.
topologychange Topology Change.
memberupdown Member Up/Down.
enable Enables trap.
disable Disables trap.
set traphost Function: To set the IP address, community name and version of the trap host.
Mode: SNMP configuration mode
Format: set traphost <A.B.C.D> <name> [<ver>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<A.B.C.D> IP address.
<name> Community name.
<ver> Version number. By default, it is 1.
Example: Set the IP address of the trap host to 10.40.44.167, the community name to seu, and the version number to 2.
set traphost 10.40.44.167 seu 2
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 333
show snmp Function: To display SNMP information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show snmp [community|view|trap|host]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
community Displays the snmp community information.
view Displays the snmp view information.
trap Displays the snmp trap information.
host Displays the snmp host information.
Example 1: Display all SNMP information.
show snmp
Example 2: Display the configured SNMP host address.
show snmp host
RMON Configuration set alarm Function: To set an alarm group.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
334 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Mode: SNMP configuration mode
Format: set alarm <1-65535> {interval <1-65535>|variable <mib-oid>|sampletype {absolute|delta}|startup {rising|falling|both}|threshold <1-65535> eventindex <1-65535> {rising|falling}|owner <name>|status {valid|underCreation|createRequest|invalid}}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-65535> The index/time interval (unit: second)/peak value/event index of the alarm group.
<mib-oid> Information path.
<name> Name of the owner.
absolute The sampling type of the alarm group is absolute value sampling.
delta The sampling type of the alarm group is relative value sampling.
rising The alarm group is triggered upon the rising of the data.
falling The alarm group is triggered upon the falling of the data.
both The alarm group is triggered upon the rising and falling of the data.
valid The status of the alarm group is “valid”.
underCreation The status of the alarm group is “underCreation”.
createRequest The status of the alarm group is “createRequest”.
invalid The status of the alarm group is “invalid”.
Example 1: Set the time interval of the alarm instance with the index of 10 to 100s.
set alarm 10 interval 100
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 335
Example 2: Set the sampling object of the alarm instance with the index of 10 to 1.3.6.2.19.2.
set alarm 10 variable 1.3.6.2.19.2
Example 3: Set the sampling type of the alarm instance with the index of 10 to delta.
set alarm 10 sampletype delta
Example 4: Set the alarm instance with the index of 10 which is triggered upon the rising of the data.
set alarm 10 startup rising
Example 5: Specify that the alarm instance with the index of 10 triggers the event with index of 100 when the data rises up to 30,000.
set alarm 10 threshold 30000 eventindex 100 rising
Example 6: Set the owner of the alarm instance with the index of 10 to “user1”.
set alarm 10 owner user1
Example 7: Set the status of the alarm instance with the index of 10 to “invalid”.
set alarm 10 status invalid
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
336 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
set event Function: To set an event group.
Mode: SNMP configuration mode
Format: set event <1-65535> {description <string>|type {none|log|snmptrap| logandtrap}|owner <name>|community <name>|status {valid|underCreation| createRequest|invalid}}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-65535> Index of the event group.
<string> Description.
<name> Name/community name of the owner.
none The type of the event group is none.
log The type of the event group is log.
snmptrap The type of the event group is trap.
logandtrap The type of the event group is log and trap.
valid The status of the event group is “valid”.
underCreation The status of the event group is “underCreation”
createRequest The status of the event group is “createRequest”.
invalid The status of the event group is “invalid”.
Example 1: Set the description of the event instance with the index of 10 to initial.
set event 10 description initial
Example 2: Set the type of the event instance with the index of 10 to log.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 337
set event 10 type log
Example 3: Set the community name of the event instance with the index of 10 to seu.
set event 10 community seu
Example 4: Set the owner of the event instance with the index of 10 to tom.
set event 10 owner tom
Example 5: Set the status of the event instance with the index of 10 to invalid.
set event 10 status invalid
set history Function: To set a history group.
Mode: SNMP configuration mode
Format: set history <1-65535> {datasource <portname>|bucketRequested <1-65535>|owner <name>|interval <1-3600>|status {valid|underCreation| createRequest|invalid}}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-65535> Index of the history group/value of the buckerRequest.
<portname> A port number or port name.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
338 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
<name> Name of the owner.
<1-3600> The time interval of the history group. The unit is second.
valid The status of the history group is “valid”.
underCreation The status of the history group is “underCreation”.
createRequest The status of the history group is “createRequest”.
invalid The status of the history group is “invalid”.
Note that the range of parameter <portname> is 1~9 on the ZXR10 2609, 1~18 on the ZXR10 2818S, 1~26 on the ZXR10 2826S, and 1~52 on the ZXR10 2852S.
Example 1: Set the data source of the history instance with the index of 10 to port 1.
set history 10 datasource 1
Example 2: Set the data source of the history instance with the index of 10 to port userx.
set history 10 datasource userx
Example 3: Set the buckerRequest of the history instance with index of 10 to 100.
set history 10 bucketRequest 100
Example 4: Set the owner name of the history instance with the index of 10 to tom.
set history 10 owner tom
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 339
Example 5: Set the time interval of the history instance with the index of 10 to 100s.
set history 10 interval 100
Example 6: Set the status of the history instance with the index of 10 to invalid.
set history 10 status invalid
set rmon Function: To enable/disable RMON.
Mode: SNMP configuration mode
Format: set rmon {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
enable Enables RMON.
disable Disables RMON.
set statistics Function: To set a statistics group.
Mode: SNMP configuration mode
Format: set statistics <1-65535> {datasource <portname>|owner <name>|status {valid|underCreation|createRequest|invalid}}
Parameter:
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
340 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
<1-65535> Index of the statistics group.
<portname> A port number or port name.
<name> Name of the owner.
valid The status of the statistics group is “valid”.
underCreation The status of the statistics group is “underCreation”.
createRequest The status of the statistics group is “createRequest”.
invalid The status of the statistics group is “invalid”.
Note that the range of parameter <portname> is 1~9 on the ZXR10 2609, 1~18 on the ZXR10 2818S, 1~26 on the ZXR10 2826S, and 1~52 on the ZXR10 2852S.
Example 1: Set the data source of the statistics instance with the index of 10 to port 1.
set statistics 10 datasource 1
Example 2: Set the data source of the statistics instance with the index of 10 to port userx.
set statistics 10 datasource userx
Example 3: Set the owner name of the statistics instance with the index of 10 to tom.
set statistics 10 owner tom
Example 4: Set the status of the statistics instance with the index of 10 to invalid.
set statistics 10 status invalid
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 341
show alarm Function: To display the alarm group configuration information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show alarm [<1-65535>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-65535> Index of the alarm group.
Example 1: Display the RMON information about all alarm instances.
show alarm
Example 2: Display the RMON information about the alarm instance with the index of 10.
show alarm 10
show event Function: To display the event group configuration information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show event [<1-65535>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-65535> Index of the event group.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
342 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Example 1: Display the RMON information about all event instances.
show event
Example 2: Display the RMON information about the event instance with the index of 10.
show event 10
show history Function: To display the history group configuration information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show history [<1-65535>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-65535> Index of the history group.
Example 1: Display the RMON information about all existing history instances.
show history
Example 2: Display the RMON information about the history instance with the index of 10.
show history 10
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 343
show rmon Function: To display the RMON information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show rmon
show statistics Function: To display the statistics group configuration information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show statistics [<1-65535>]
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-65535> Index of the statistics group.
Cluster Management Configuration erase member Function: To delete the configuration of member switches in the cluster.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: erase member <idlist>
Parameter:
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
344 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
<idlist> ID of the member switch.
Example: Delete the information bout the member switch with the ID of 2.
erase member 2
reboot member Function: To start a member switch.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: reboot member <idlist>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<idlist> ID of the member switch.
Example: Restart the member switch with the ID of 1.
reboot member 1
save member Function: To save the information about member switches in the cluster.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: save member <idlist>
Parameter:
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 345
Parameter Description
<idlist> ID of the member switch.
Example: Save the information about the member switch with the ID of 4.
save member 4
set group add device Function: To add a member device according to the device number.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set group add device <idlist>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<idlist> Device ID.
Example: Add the device with the device number of 3 to the cluster.
set group add device 3
set group add mac Function: To add a member according to the device MAC address and specify the member ID.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set group add mac <xx.xx.xx> <1-255>
Parameter:
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
346 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
<xx.xx.xx> The latter part of the MAC address.
<1-255> Member ID.
Example: Add the device with the MAC address of 00.d0.d0.f2.d0.f5 to the cluster and specify the member ID as 4.
set group add mac f2.d0.f5 4
set group candidate Function: To set switches as candidate switches.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set group candidate
set group commander ipport Function: To set a switch as the command switch, specify the layer 3 port number and set the IP address pool for cluster management.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set group commander ipport <0-63> {ip-pool <A.B.C.D/M>}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-63> Number of the layer 3 port.
<A.B.C.D/M> IP address and mask.
Example: Set the command switch, specify the layer 3 port 3 for cluster management and set the IP address pool to 192.168.1.2/24.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 347
set group commander ipport 3 ip-pool 192.168.1.2/24
set group delete member Function: To delete a member according to the member ID.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set group delete member <idlist>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<idlist> Member ID.
Example: Delete a member according to the member ID.
set group delete member 3
set group independent Function: To set switches as independent switches.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set group independent
set group handtime Function: To set the time interval for automatic handshake between member switches and the command switch.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set group handtime <1-300>
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
348 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-300> Time interval for automatic handshake between member switches and the command switch. The unit is second. By default, it is 8 seconds.
Example: Set the time interval for automatic handshake between the member switches and the command switch.
set group handtime 10
set group holdtime Function: To set the valid time for holding the information about the member switch configured by the command switch.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set group holdtime <1-300>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-300> The valid time for holding the information about the member switch configured by the command switch. The unit is second. By default, it is 80 seconds.
Example: Set the valid time for holding the information about the member switch configured by the command switch to 100 seconds.
set group holdtime 100
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 349
set group name Function: To set the cluster name.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set group name <name>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<name> Sets the cluster name.
Example: Set the cluster name to zte.
set group name zte
set group tftpsvr Function: To specify the IP address of the TFTP server of the cluster.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set group tftpsvr < A.B.C.D>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<A.B.C.D> IP address.
Example: Set the IP address of the TFTP server of the cluster to 192.168.200.1.
set group tftpsvr 192.168.200.1
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
350 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
set zdp Function: To enable/disable the switch neighbor discovery function.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set zdp {enable|disable }
Parameter:
Parameter Description
enable Enables the switch neighbor recovery function.
disable Disables the switch neighbor recovery function.
set zdp holdtime Function: To set the time for saving ZDP packets sent by the device.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set zdp holdtime <10-255>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<10-255> The time for saving ZDP packets sent by the device. By default, it is 180 seconds.
set zdp port Function: To enable/disable the switch neighbor recovery function on a port.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 351
Format: set zdp port <portlist> {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables the switch neighbor recovery function.
disable Disables the switch neighbor recovery function.
Example: Enable the switch neighbor recovery function on port 2.
set zdp port 2 enable
set zdp timer Function: To set the time interval for sending ZDP packets.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set zdp timer <5-255>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<5-255> Time interval for sending ZDP packets. The unit is second. By default, it is 60 seconds.
Example: Set the time interval for sending ZDP packets to 70 seconds.
set zdp timer 70
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
352 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
set zdp trunk Function: To enable/disable the switch neighbor recovery function on a trunk.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set zdp trunk <trunklist> {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<trunklist> Trunk list.
enable Enables the switch neighbor recovery function.
disable Disables the switch neighbor recovery function.
Note: The range of parameter <trunklist> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
Example: Enable the switch neighbor recovery function on trunk 2.
set zdp trunk 2 enable
set ztp Function: To enable/disable the topology information collection function of the switch.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set ztp {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
enable Enables the topology information collection function of
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 353
Parameter Description
the switch.
disable Disables the topology information collection function of the switch.
set ztp hop Function: To set the topology information collection range (hop count).
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set zdp hop <1-128>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-128> Topology information collection range (hop count). By default, it is 4.
set ztp hopdelay Function: To set the delay for the device to forward topology information collection packets.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set ztp hopdelay <1-1000>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-1000> Delay for the device to forward topology information collection packets. The unit is millisecond. By default, it is 200 milliseconds.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
354 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Example: Set the delay for the device to forward topology information collection packets to 400 milliseconds.
set ztp hopdelay 400
set ztp port Function: To enable/disable the topology information collection function on a port.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set ztp port <portlist> {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables the topology information collection function on a port.
disable Disables the topology information collection function on a port.
Example: Enable the topology information collection function on port 2.
set ztp port 2 enable
set ztp portdelay Function: To set the delay for the next port of the device to forward topology information collection packets.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set ztp portdelay <1-100>
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 355
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-100> Delay for the next port of the device to forward topology information collection packets. The unit is millisecond. By default, it is 20 milliseconds.
Example: Set the delay for the next port of the device to forward topology information collection packets to 40 milliseconds.
set ztp portdelay 40
set ztp timer Function: To set the time interval for starting the automatic topology information collection.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set ztp timer <0-65535>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<0-65535> Time interval. The unit is minute. “0” indicates that the connection is not conducted.
Example: Set the time interval for starting the automatic topology information collection to 2 minutes.
set ztp timer 2
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
356 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
set ztp trunk Function: To enable/disable the topology information function of the switch on a trunk.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set ztp trunk <trunklist> {enable|disable }
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<trunklist> Trunk list.
enable Enables the topology information collection of the switch.
disable Disables the topology information collection of the switch.
Note: The range of parameter <trunklist> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
Example: Enable the topology information collection function of the switch on trunk 2.
set zdp trunk 2 enable
set ztp vlan Function: To specify that the topology information collection is conducted in a VLAN.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: set ztp vlan <1-4094>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 357
Parameter Description
<1-4094> VLAN ID. The range is 1~4094.
Example: Specify that the topology information collection is conducted in vlan 40.
set ztp vlan 40
show group Function: To display the cluster management information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show group
show group candidate Function: To display information about candidate switches in the cluster.
Mode: All modes
Format: show group candidate
show group member Function: To display information about member switches in the cluster.
Mode: All modes
Format: show group member <1-255>
Parameter:
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
358 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description
<1-255> ID of the member switch.
Example: Display information about the switch with the cluster member ID of 6.
show group member 6
show zdp Function: To display the ZDP configuration information about the switch.
Mode: All modes
Format: show zdp
show zdp neighbour Function: To display the neighbor device information detected by the ZDP protocol.
Mode: All modes
Format: show zdp neighbour {detail}
show ztp Function: To display the configuration information about the topology information collection protocol.
Mode: All modes
Format: show ztp
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 359
show ztp device Function: To display the configuration about the topology information collection protocol according to the device number.
Mode: All modes
Format: show ztp device <idlist>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<idlist> Device number.
Example: Display information about the device with the device number of 2 in the topology information collection results.
show ztp device 2
show ztp mac Function: To display the configuration information about the topology information collection protocol according to the MAC address of the device.
Mode: All modes
Format: set ztp mac <xx.xx.xx>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<xx.xx.xx> The latter part of the MAC address.
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
360 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Example: Display the configuration information about the topology information collection protocol according to the MAC address of the device.
set ztp mac f2.d0.f5
ztp start Function: To start the topology information collection procedure.
Mode: Cluster management configuration mode
Format: ztp start
Single-port Loop Test set loopDetect blockDelay Function: To set the port blocking interval during the loop.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set loopDetect blockDelay <1-1080>
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<1-1080> Time interval. The unit is minute. By default, it is 5 minutes.
set loopDetect port Function: To enable/disable the port loop detection.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 361
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set loopDetect port <portlist> {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables the port loop detection.
disable Disables the port loop detection.
set loopDetect port protect Function: To enable/disable the port protection in case of port loop.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set loopDetect port <portlist> protect {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<portlist> Port list.
enable Enables the port protection.
disable Disables the port protection.
set loopDetect trunk Function: To enable/disable the trunk loop detection.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set loopDetect trunk <trunklist> {enable|disable}
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
362 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<trunklist> Trunk ID list.
enable Enables the trunk loop detection.
disable Disables the trunk loop detection.
Note that the range of parameter <trunklist> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
set loopDetect trunk protect Function: To enable/disable the trunk protection in case of trunk loop.
Mode: Global configuration mode
Format: set loopDetect trunk <trunklist> protect {enable|disable}
Parameter:
Parameter Description
<trunklist> Trunk ID list.
enable Enables the trunk protection.
disable Disables the trunk protection.
Note that the range of parameter <trunklist> is 1~8 on the ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S, and 1~16 on the ZXR10 2852S.
Chapter 10 - Command Reference
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 363
show loopDetect Function: To display the port loop information.
Mode: All modes
Format: show loopDetect
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
364 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
This page is intentionally blank.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 365
A p p e n d i x A
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Full Name
ABR Area Border Router
ACL Access Control List
AD Administrative Distance
ARP Address ResolutionProtocol
AS Autonomous System
ASBR Autonomous System Border Router
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
BGP Border Gateway Protocol
BOOTP BOOTstrap Protocol
BRD Backup Designate Router
CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol
CIDR Classless Inter-Domain Routing
CLNP ConnectionLess Network Protocol
CLNS ConnectionLess Network Sevice
CoS Class of Service
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRLDP Constraint based Routing Label Distribution Protocol
CSN Cryptographic Sequence Number
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
366 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Abbreviation Full Name
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIS Designate IS
DNS Domain Name System
DR Designate Router
EBGP External Border Gateway Protocal
EGP External Gateway Protocol
ES End System
FEC Forwarding Equivalence Class
FIFO First In and First Out
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FSM Finite State Machine
FTP File Transfer Protocol
GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter
GRE General Routing Encapsulation
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IGMP Internet Group Mangement Protocol
IGP Interior Gateway Protocol
IP Internet Protocol
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ISP Internet Service Provider
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAN Local Area Network
LAPB Link Access Procedure Balanced
LCP Link Control Protocol
LDP Label Distribution Protocol
Appendix A - Abbreviations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 367
Abbreviation Full Name
LSA Link State Advertisement
LSP Link State PDU
LSR Label Switch Router
MAC Media Access Control
MD5 Message Digest 5
MED MULTI_EXIT_DISC
MIB Management Information Base
MPLS Multi-Protocol Label Switching
MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTU Maximum Transmission Unit
NAT Network Address Translation
NBMA Non-Broadcast Multiple Access
NCP Network Control Protocol
NIC Network Information Center
NLRI Network Layer Reachable Information
NMS Network Management System
NSAP Network Service Access Point
NSP Network Service Provider
NTP Network Time Protocol
NVT Network Virtual Terminal
OAM Operation And Management
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
PAP Passwork Authentication Protocol
PAT Port Address Translation
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
368 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Abbreviation Full Name
PDU Protocol Data Unit
POS Packet over SDH
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PSNP Partial Sequence Num PDU
QoS Quality of Service
RARP Reverse Address Resolution Protocol
RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service
RFC Request For Comments
RIP Routing Information Protocol
RLE Route lookup engine
RMON Remote Monitoring
ROS Router Operation System
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSVP Resource Reservation Protocol
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDLC Synchronous Data Link Control
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SNP Sequence Num PDU
SPF Shortest Path First
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol
ToS Type Of Service
TELNET Telecommunication Network Protocol
TTL Time To Live
Appendix A - Abbreviations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 369
Abbreviation Full Name
UDP User Datagram Protocol
VID VLAN Identifier
VLSM Variable Length Subnet Mask
VPN Virtual Private Network
VRF Virtual Routing Forwarding
VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
WAN Wide Area Network
WWW World Wide Web
ZGMP Zte Group Manage Protocol
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
370 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
This page is intentionally blank.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 371
Figures
Figure 1 Typical Workgroup Networking Structure ...................... 34 Figure 2 Typical Networking of MAN Broadband Access ............... 35 Figure 3 ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Working Principle ...... 38 Figure 4 Front Panel of the ZXR10 2609.................................... 39 Figure 5 Front Panel of the ZXR10 2818S.................................. 41 Figure 6 Front Panel of the ZXR10 2826S.................................. 42 Figure 7 Front Panel of the ZXR10 2852S.................................. 43 Figure 8 SF-1FE-S40KSC Sub-board......................................... 45 Figure 9 SF-1FE-S15KSC sub-board ......................................... 46 Figure 10 SF-1FE-M02KSC sub-board ....................................... 46 Figure 11 SF-2GE-2RJ45 Sub-board (FGEI) ............................... 47 Figure 12 SF-2GE-2SFP Sub-board (FGFI) ................................. 47 Figure 13 SF-2GE-SFPRJ45 Sub-board (FGFE) ........................... 48 Figure 14 Rear Panel of the ZXR10 2818S/2826S (DC power supply)
................................................................................... 49 Figure 15 Rear Panel of the ZXR10 2818S/2826S (AC power supply)
................................................................................... 49 Figure 16 Rear Panel of the ZXR10 2852S (DC power supply) ...... 50 Figure 17 Rear Panel of the ZXR10 2852S (AC power supply)....... 50 Figure 18 Installing Plastic Feet ............................................... 52 Figure 19 Installing Flanges .................................................... 53 Figure 20 Installing Holders .................................................... 54 Figure 21 Fixing Equipment..................................................... 55 Figure 22 AC Power Cable....................................................... 56 Figure 23 –48 Power Socket.................................................... 57 Figure 24 DC Power Cable....................................................... 57 Figure 25 Serial Port Configuration Cable .................................. 58 Figure 26 Structure of Network Cable ....................................... 59 Figure 27 Transverse English Label on Panels and Connectors ...... 62 Figure 28 Roll-type Self-cover Laser print Label Model II ............. 63 Figure 29 Transverse English Type I Label................................. 64 Figure 30 Pattern and Meanings of the Engineering Label on the
Optical Fiber.................................................................. 64 Figure 31 Cabling of the Ethernet Switch in a Building................. 66 Figure 32 Cabling of a Convergence Switch ............................... 67
ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Access Switch User’s Manual
372 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Figure 33 Creating a Connection...............................................69 Figure 34 Connection Configuration Information .........................70 Figure 35 Port Attribute Settings ..............................................71 Figure 36 ZXR10 2609/2818S/2826S/2852S Configuration Modes.78 Figure 37 Run the Telnet.........................................................79 Figure 38 Switch Remote Login Window ....................................80 Figure 39 TFTPD Server Interface .............................................91 Figure 40 Tftpd Settings Dialog Box ..........................................92 Figure 41 Example of Overlapping VLAN .................................. 118 Figure 42 Example of VLAN Transparent Transmission ............... 119 Figure 43 Example of LACP Configuration ................................ 125 Figure 44 Network Topology for One-To-Many Communication.... 130 Figure 45 MSTP Topological Structure ..................................... 132 Figure 46 PVLAN Configuration Example .................................. 144 Figure 47 Configuration Example of Static Route....................... 148 Figure 48 Using PAP Mode for Identity Authentication................ 153 Figure 49 Using CHAP Mode for Identity Authentication.............. 154 Figure 50 Using EAP-MD5 Mode for Identity Authentication ........ 155 Figure 51 Typical QinQ Networking ......................................... 165 Figure 52 SSH Configuration Example ..................................... 173 Figure 53 Setting IP Address and Port Number of the SSH Server 174 Figure 54 Setting SSH Version Number ................................... 175 Figure 55 User Confirmation Required in the First Login ............. 176 Figure 56 SSH Login Result ................................................... 176 Figure 57 Cluster Management Networking .............................. 189 Figure 58 Switch Role Changeover Rule................................... 190
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 373
Tables
Table 1 Typographical Conventions ......................................... xxv Table 2 Mouse Operation Conventions .................................... xxvi Table 3 Safety Signs ............................................................xxvii Table 4 Techincal Features and Parameters ............................... 36 Table 5 Pinout of Serial Port Configuration Cable ........................ 58 Table 6 RJ45 Pinout of Straight-through Cable ........................... 59 Table 7 RJ45J Pinout of Crossover Cable ................................... 60 Table 8 Fiber Types ............................................................... 61 Table 9 Temperature and Humidity Table .................................. 72 Table 10 Functional keys ........................................................ 87 Table 11 Default Settings of Port Parameters............................111 Table 12 Maintenance and Test Period of the Ethernet Switch System
..................................................................................205 Table 13 Parameter Description ..............................................217